Technical Reference Manual - Support

Technical Reference 

Manual 

MR Series 

English 

EPSON 

403308709 

Rev. I

MR Series Technical Reference Manual 

Revision Table 

Rev. Page Description 

Rev. A All pages Newly authorized 

Rev. B Chapter 5 BIOS updated from 2.06 to 2.08 

9-2 Added explanation and listing of "touch panel position adjust jig" in "Required Tools". 

Reason for change: The tool is now supplied for assembling the touch panel assembly. 

9-18—20 Added new explanation for installation of the touch panel assembly.Reason for 

change: 

The touch panel assembly needs to be assembled and attached to the main frame 

using the “touch panel position adjust jig“tool. 

9-21 Added the explanation below in the “removing the LCD“. 

Note: 

When replacing the LCD, you need to change the electric-conductive tape also. 

Reason for change: This explanation was missing. 

B-7,9,11,13 

Added the parts in the Parts List and Exploded Diagram. 

For DM-M820-014: 

- upper plate (Ref# 120) 

- lower plate (Ref# 121) 

- touch panel assembly (Ref#:1056) 

Reason for change; 

The for the touch panel assembly unit was changed. 

For IM-800: 

- Ferrite core (Ref#; 220) 

Reason for change: This explanation was missing. 

Rev. C 1-7,9.2-2,4 Add the Indiividual Sales of IM and DM. 

vii,viii,1-1,6,10,2- 

4,7-4 

1-3-6,11,2-1,6- 

1,2 

Add the AC Adapter OI-MR01. 

Revision of the illustration. 

3-1,3 Revision of the Hardware diagram. 

4-1,3,17,19 Add the installation for Windows XP Professional Locally Procured Edition. 

4-2 Add the explanation for Driver CD-ROM. 

4-3 Add the Touch Panel Driver for Asian. 

4-26-27, Add the uninstaiiing the Serial Port Driver for Windows 2000. 

4-32 Add the Installing the Service Pack 6a for Windows NT. 

5-7 BIOS updated from 2.06 to 2.09. 

5-16-19 Add the supplementary explanation for Power Management. 

Chapter 8 

Chanded the explanations for troubleshooting. 

The changed points; 

The each explanation for the trouble related to specific models is noted by an icon. 


The display with the touch panel assembly and without the MSR unit is newly supplied. 

9-3 Addd the explanation for the DM-M820-015 in the work diagram for DM-M820. 


The display (DM-M820) with the touch panel assembly and without the MSR unit is 

newly supplied. 

Rev. I i


9-24,27,28,37 Added the explanation for disassembly and assemblyof the parts below. 

-PCI card 

-Switch cable assembly 

9-29 The method of disassembly and assembly the CD/FDD bracket is changed. 

The changed point. 

One screw and stopper is added to fix the CD/FDD bracket correctly. 


The part is changed to prevent the CD/FDD bracket from connection failure. 

B-11—15 

Added parts list and block diagram for the model DM-M820-015. 


The display with the touch panel assembly and without the MSR unit is newly supplied. 

Rev.D 9-19 Added the explanation of attaching the touch panel. 


To be supplied the touch panel unit (115) newly. 

9-30 

Appendix B 

9-32 

Appendix B 

Appendix B 

Changed the explanation of attaching the CD-ROM unit with the screws “C.B.screw. 

2x2.5.F/ZN”. 


T wo screws “C.B.screw. 2x2.5.F/ZN“ attaching the CD-ROM unit are added. 

Deleted the explanation of attaching the gasket to the FDD unit. 


We stop supplying the gasket. 

Changed the partslist and Exploded Diagrams. 

The added parts in the list is indicated below. 

Touch panel unit (Reference number: 115) 

Rev.E 1-1,7,9-37 Add the 2.5”HDD. 


To be changed the composition of the parts. 

Note; 

The parts (Touch panel, Upper plate, Lower plate, Touch panel asssembly) will be not 

supplied. Because the touch panel unit will be supplied instead of them. And the 

touch panel assembly and the touch panel unit is interchangeality. 

1-3 Add the Inside view. 

1-7 Add the Lithium Battery. 

1-8,9,AppB 

Add the Gray color Models. 

5-12,27 Add the On board Lan Boot ROM. 

6-2 Add the Adjusting the volume. 

8-8 Add the Unable to Read Data from HDD. 

8-11 Add the Speaker Faults. 

9-29 Add the RAID Card. 

9-31,34 Add the Power cable is differentn for 3.5”HDD or 2.5”HDD. 

9-45 Add the Speaker. 

A-1 Add the 2.5”HDD Jumper Settings. 

B-16 Revision of the Parts list IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model. 

B-19,20 

Add the Parts list IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model. 

B-21 Add the IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model Component Block. 

ii 

Rev. I



Rev.F 4-73-77 

5-1,15,19,20 

5-30 

5-1,2,15,19 

5-20,30 

Add the HDD Power Down Settings. 

Add the BIOS Ver.2.13.00. 

3-6 Add the RTC (Real Time Clock). 

Rev.G 

v,vii 

1-1,3,4,, 9,10 

2-1,3,5,6 

3-1,4,,6 

8-3,14,15,18 

8-23 

9-25,30,31 

9-51 -54 

B-16 -24 

1-1,11 

B-2 -15 

Add the IM-800 with TM Printer Power Supply model. 

Add the DM-M820 High brightness model. 

9-33,42 Add the notes. 

9-50 Add the Speaker instdliation. 

B-16 -24 Add the COM cable, B. 

Rev. H 7-1,4 -6 

9-2,4,27 -39 

B-11 -15 

Add the change of LCD. 

Rev.I 9-68,70 Add the Cautions. 

Rev. I iii

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Cautions 

No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in 

any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, 

without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. 

The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. Please contact us for the 

latest information. 

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, Seiko Epson 

Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. 

Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information 

contained herein. 

Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this 

product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by the purchaser or 

third parties as a result of: accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized 

modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly 

comply with Seiko Epson Corporation’s operating and maintenance instructions. 

Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable against any damages or problems arising from 

the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original 

EPSON Products or EPSON Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation. 

EPSON is registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. 

Intel and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. 

IBM, PC/AT, and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines 

Corporation. 

Microsoft, Windows, MS-DOS and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft 

Corporation. 

General Notice: Other product and company names used herein are for identification purposes 

only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. 

Copyright © 2002 by Seiko Epson Corporation, Japan. 

iv 

Rev. I


Important Safety Information 

This section presents important information intended to ensure safe and effective use of this 

product. Read this section carefully, and store it in an accessible location. 

Key to Symbols 

The symbols in this manual are identified by their level of importance, as defined below. Read 

the following carefully before handling the product. 

WARNING: 

Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid serious bodily injury. 

CAUTION: 

Cautions must be observed to avoid minor injury to yourself or damage to your 

equipment. 

Safety Precautions for the IM-800 

WARNING: 

If you are using 100-127 V power, set the AC voltage select switch to 115. 

If you are using 200-240 V power, set the AC voltage select switch to 230. (The factory 

setting is 230.) If the setting is wrong, the system will be damaged and will not operate. 

(For the standard model) 

Unplug the power cable immediately if the IM-800 produces smoke, a strange odor, or 

unusual noise. Continued use may lead to fire or electric shock. Contact your dealer or 

an EPSON service center for advice. 

Never insert or disconnect the power plug with wet hands. Doing so may result in severe 

shock. 

Do not allow foreign objects to fall into this product. Penetration by foreign objects may 

lead to fire or shock. 

If water or other liquid spills into this product, turn off the front power switch, unplug the 

power cable immediately, and then contact your dealer or an EPSON service center for 

advice. Continued usage may lead to fire or shock. 

Always supply power directly from a standard domestic power outlet. 

Do not place multiple loads on the power outlet (wall outlet). Overloading the outlet 

may lead to fire. 

The equipment must be installed near the electrical outlet, and the outlet must be easily 

accessible. 

Do not attempt to open or disassemble the internal lithium battery. This could result in 

burns or release of hazardous chemicals. 

Rev. I v

Do not charge the internal lithium battery or leave it in a hot place such as near a fire or 

on a heater because it could overheat and ignite. 

When you dispose of the internal lithium battery, insulate it by wrapping the terminals 

with tape. Mixing the battery with other metals or batteries may lead to fire, heat, or 

explosion. 

Be sure your power cable meets the relevant safety standards and includes a power 

system ground terminal (PE terminal). 

There is a ventilation opening on the right side; do not place any object in front of it. If 

you set this product upright, be sure the ventilation opening is on the top. Do not place 

any object on top of the ventilation opening. 

Handle the power cable with care. Improper handling may lead to fire or shock. 

Do not modify or attempt to repair the cable. 

Do not place any object on top of the cable. 

Avoid excessive bending, twisting, and pulling of the cable. 

Do not place the cable near heating equipment. 

Check that the plug is clean before plugging it in. 

Be sure to push the prongs all the way in. 

Do not use a damaged cable. 

Regularly remove the power plug from the outlet and clean the base of the prongs and 

between the prongs. If you leave the power plug in the outlet for a long time, dust may 

collect on the base of the prongs, causing a short and fire. 

CAUTION: 

When replacing the battery, use only an equivalent type battery recommended by the 

manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only 

with the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains 

lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. 

Do not connect cables other than those specified in this manual. Doing so may result in 

fire or improper operation. 

Do not connect the unit to electrical outlets that are close to devices that generate 

voltage fluctuations or electrical noise. In particular, stay clear of devices that use large 

electric motors. 

Always connect the power cable to the IM-800 before plugging it into the wall outlet. 

Be sure to push the plug of the power cable all the way into the AC inlet of this product. 

The plug should make contact with the back of the inlet. 

When disconnecting the power cable, hold the plug firmly. Do not tug on the cord itself. 

vi 

Rev. I


Be sure to set this product on a firm, stable, horizontal surface. The product may break or 

cause injury if it falls. 

Do not use the unit in locations subject to high humidity or dust levels. Excessive humidity 

and dust may cause equipment damage, fire, or shock. 

Do not use the unit in locations subject to liquids, since this product is not waterproof. 

Do not use the product where inflammable fumes of gasoline, benzine, thinner or other 

inflammable liquids may be in the air. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. 

Do not place heavy objects on top of this product. Equipment may fall or collapse, 

causing breakage and possible injury. 

To ensure safety, unplug this product before leaving it unused for an extended period. 

Do not drop, bump, or otherwise subject this product to strong vibration or impact. 

Do not block the openings on this product. Be sure not to install the product in a narrow 

place that is not well ventilated, not to place it on any bedding or carpet and not to put 

any cloth such as a tablecloth or blanket on it. The openings are provided for the 

ventilation necessary to ensure reliable operation and protection from overheating or 

fire. 

Be sure to attach all covers after setup. If they are not attached, foreign matter may 

enter this product and it may not operate correctly. 

Never clean the product with thinner, benzine, alcohol, or other such solvent. 

Do not use aerosol sprayers containing flammable gas inside or around this product. 

Doing so may cause fire. 

Do not use this product with any voltage other than the specified one. Doing so may 

lead to fire. 

When a power cable for the TM printer is connected, do not short-circuit its connector 

pins. (For the 24V model) 

Do not insert fingers or foreign matter into the CD-ROM disk tray or openings. Doing so 

may lead to fire, shock, or injury. 

Never hold this product by the rear cover, the front panel, or the CD-ROM disk tray. They 

cannot support the weight of the product, so it may fall onto the floor. 

Make sure that the total power requirements of all devices receiving power from this 

product do not exceed the power limitation. See the specifications for more detailed 

information. 

Be careful not to cut your finger on any edge of the unit. 

Be sure to use EPSON supplied DIMMs, HDDs, and CPUs. 

Before using a PCI card, it is your responsibility to examine it carefully to confirm whether 

its specifications conform to the specifications described in this manual. To get the latest 

information about which PCI board can be used with this product, contact your EPSON 

dealer. 

Rev. I vii

If you turn off the unit, wait at least 10 seconds before you turn it on again. 

Safety Precautions for the DM-M820 

WARNING: 

Turn off the power switch immediately and unplug the DC plug if the DM-M820 or AC 

Adapter produces smoke, a strange odor, or unusual noise. Continued use may lead to 

fire or electric shock. Contact your dealer or an EPSON service center for advice. 

The DM-M820 contains a glass panel. If the DM-M820 is dropped or treated roughly, the 

glass may break. 

Do not place your LCD Monitor in direct sunlight or near a heat source. 

Do not allow foreign objects to fall into this product. Penetration by foreign objects may 

lead to fire or shock. 

If water or other liquid spills into this product, turn off the power switch, unplug the DC 

plug immediately, and then contact your dealer or an EPSON service center for advice. 

Continued usage may lead to fire or shock. 

CAUTION: 

Do not connect cables other than those specified in this manual. Doing so may result 

improper operation. 

Be sure to set this product on a firm, stable, horizontal surface. The product may break or 

cause injury if it falls. 

Do not use the unit in locations subject to high humidity or dust levels. Excessive humidity 

and dust may cause equipment damage, fire, or shock. 

Do not use the unit in locations subject to liquids, since this product is not waterproof. 

Do not use the product where inflammable fumes of gasoline, benzine, thinner or other 

inflammable liquids may be in the air. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. 

To ensure safety, unplug this product before leaving it unused for an extended period. 

Do not drop, bump, or otherwise subject this product to strong vibration or impact. 

Never clean the product with thinner, benzine or other such solvent. 

Do not use aerosol sprayers containing flammable gas inside or around this product. 

Doing so may cause fire. 

If you want to use a compressed air product, such as an air duster, for cleaning during 

repair and maintenance, use of products containing flammable gas is prohibited. 

Be sure to use this product with all covers attached. 

Be careful not to cut your finger on any edge of the unit. 

viii 

Rev. I


Safety Precautions for the OI-MR01 AC Adapter 

WARNING: 

Shut down your equipment immediately if it produces smoke, a strange odor, or unusual 

noise. Continued use may lead to fire or electric shock. Immediately unplug the 

equipment and contact your dealer or a SEIKO EPSON service center for advice. 

Never attempt to repair this product yourself. Improper repair work can be dangerous. 

Never disassemble or modify this product. Tampering with this product may result in 

injury, fire, or electric shock. 


shock. 

Do not allow foreign matter to fall into the equipment. Penetration of foreign objects 

may lead to fire or shock. 

If water or other liquid spills into this equipment, unplug the power cable immediately, 

and then contact your dealer or a SEIKO EPSON service center for advice. Continued 

usage may lead to fire or shock. 




Handle the power cable with care. Improper handling may lead to fire or shock. 

Do not modify or attempt to repair the cable. 

Do not place any object on top of the cable. 

Avoid excessive bending, twisting, and pulling of the cable. 

Do not place cord near heating equipment. 

Check that the plug is clean before plugging it in. 

Be sure to push the prongs all the way in. 

If the cable becomes damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer or a SEIKO 

EPSON service center. 

Regularly remove the power plug from the outlet and clean the base of the prongs and 

between the prongs. If you leave the power plug in the outlet for a long time, dust may 

collect on the base of the prongs, causing a short and fire. 

Rev. I ix

CAUTION: 

Be sure your power cable meets the relevant safety standards and includes a powersystem 

ground terminal (PE terminal). 

Be sure to use this product only with a DM-M820 LCD unit. Do not connect it to 

equipment from other manufacturers. Use this product only for its intended application. 

Improper usage may lead to equipment damage, fire, or shock. 

Be sure to set this unit on a firm, stable, horizontal surface. Product may break or cause 

injury if it falls. 

Do not use in locations subject to high humidity or dust levels. Excessive humidity and 

dust may cause equipment damage, fire, or shock. 

Do not place heavy objects on top of this product. Never stand or lean on this product. 

Equipment may fall or collapse, causing breakage and possible injury. 

To ensure safety, please unplug this product prior to leaving it unused for an extended 

period. 

Be sure the product is not covered with any fabric, such as a blanket or tablecloth, 

during use. This may cause overheating inside the product and lead to fire. 

x 

Rev. I


About this Manual 

Aim of the Manual 

This manual was created to provide all information necessary for system planning, design, 

installation, application, and service of the MR series for designers and developers of POS 

systems and for servicers of the products. 

Manual Contents 

The manual is made up of the following sections: 

Chapter 1 

Chapter 2 

Chapter 3 

Chapter 4 

Chapter 5 

Chapter 6 

Chapter 7 

Chapter 8 

Chapter 9 

Appendix A 

Appendix B 

Features and Overview 

Setup for the IM-800 and the DM-D820 

Hardware Specifications 

OS and Drivers 

BIOS Functions 

Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-D820 

Maintenance and Adjustment 

Troubleshooting 

Disassembly and Assembly 

Jumper Settings 

Parts Information 

Related Documentation 

Documents related to the MR Series are listed below. 

Name of document 

IM-800 User’s Manual 

DM-M820 User’s Manual 

OI-MR01 User’s Manual 

Description 

Provides information to enable POS operators to use the 

IM-800 safely and correctly. 


DM-M820 safely and correctly. 


AC Adapter OI-MR01 safely. 

Rev. I xi

Contents 

Revision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 

Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 

Key to Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 

Safety Precautions for the IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 

Safety Precautions for the DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii 

Safety Precautions for the OI-MR01 AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix 

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 

Aim of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 

Manual Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 

Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii 

Chapter 1 Features and Overview 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 

IM-800 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 

DM-M820 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 

Model Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 

IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 

DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 

Part Names for IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 

Part Names for DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 

IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 

DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 

AC Adapter (OI-MR01)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 

IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 

DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 

Chapter 2 Setup for the IM-800 and the DM-M820 

Setting the AC Voltage for the IM-800 (For the Standard model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 

IM-800 Installation Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 

Installing the DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 

Cable Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 

Connecting the DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with a Touch Panel and MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with a Touch Panel and without an MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with No Touch Panel and No MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 

Connecting the Power Cable for AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 

IM-800 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 

Connecting Other Peripheral Devices to the IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Serial Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Connecting a Serial Modem to the IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

USB Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Keyboard and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Connecting the Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Attaching the Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 

xii 

Rev. I


Chapter 3 Hardware Specifications 

Hardware Block Diagram for IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 

DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 

System Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 

Configuration of Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 

Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 

Riser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 

COM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 

DC24V Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 

PCI Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 

Standard model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 

24V model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 

Power Supply Capacities to Each Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 

Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 

MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 

Chapter 4 OS and Drivers 

Outline of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 

Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 

Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 

Windows 2000 Pre-Installed Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 

Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 

Directory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 

Windows 2000 Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 

Installing the MSR Utility for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 

Recovering the OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 

Windows 98 Pre-Installed Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 


Directory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12 

Windows 98 Set-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 

Installing the MSR Utility for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 

Recovering the OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 

Installation for Windows XP Professional Locally Procured Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 


Installing the Serial Port Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver, MSR Utility and the Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 

Installation for Windows 2000 Professional Locally Procured Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 


Installing the Intel Chipset Diver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 

Installing the Network Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 

Installing the Display Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 

Installing the Sound Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 



Installation for Windows NT Locally procured edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 


Installing the Network Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 

Installing Service Pack 6a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 

Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 

Installing the Display Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 

Installing the Sound Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 



Rev. I xiii

Installation for Windows 98 Locally Procured Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 

Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 

Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 

Installing the Chipset Driver for Intel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 

Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 

Installing the Network Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 

Installing the Display Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 

Installing the Sound Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 

Installing the Serial Port Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver, MSR Utility and the Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 

Installation for MS-DOS Locally Procured Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 

Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 

Installing the CD-ROM Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 

Installing the Network Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 

Installing the Serial Port Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver, MSR utility and the Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 

Installation of Other Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver for MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 

Installing the MSR Utility for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 

Installing the MSR Utility for MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 

Setting of Windows and Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 

Touch Panel Driver for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 

Touch Panel Driver for MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 

HDD Power Down Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 

MSR Utility for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 

Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 

MSR Utility for MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 

Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility For MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 

Chapter 5 BIOS Functions 

HDD Power Down Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 

BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 

Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

The help display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

Changing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 

BIOS Setup Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 

Standard CMOS Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 

Advanced BIOS Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 

Advanced Chipset Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 

Integrated Peripherals Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 

POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 

Supplementary Explanation for Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 

PNP/PCI Configurations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 

Defaults and Selectable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 

Standard CMOS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 

Advanced BIOS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 

Advanced Chipset Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 

Integrated Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 

POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 

PNP/PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 

Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 

Device Diagnostics Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 

xiv 

Rev. I


Chapter 6 Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 

IM-800 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 

Force Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 

LEDs for IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 

LEDs on Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 

Opening and Closing of the CD/FDD Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 

CD-ROM Emergency Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 

Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 

DM-M820 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 

Indicators for DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 

Beep (only for models with an MSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 

DM-M820 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 

Adjusting the View Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 

How to Use a Touch Panel (for the Touch Panel Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 

How to Read a Magnetic Stripe Card (for the Model with an MSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Adjustment 

Cleaning the IM-800 Front Panel Ventilation Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 

Display Adjustment for DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 

Determining which procedure to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 

Display Adjustment (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 

Display Adjustment (SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 

Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 

MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 

Maintenance for AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 

Flow of Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 

Preparations for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 

Problems and Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 

System Unable to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 

Power Management Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 

System Clock Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 

Memory Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 

Floppy Disk Drive Unit Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 

HDD Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 

CD-ROM Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 

Network Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 

Speaker Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 

LCD Display Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 

Touch Panel Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 

Printer Unit Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 

Serial Port, Parallel Port, USB Port, and Keyboard/Mouse Port Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 

Faults that are Difficult to Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 

Power Supply Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 

MSR Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 

POST Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 

Procedures for Testing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 

Rev. I xv

Chapter 9 Disassembly and Assembly 

Disassembly and Assembly of the DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 

Determining which procedure to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 

Precautions Before Assembly and Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 

Conceptual Work Diagram for DM-M820 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 

Disassembling the Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 

Base Assembly(117) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 

Removing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 

Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 

Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 

Removing the Components (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 

MSR Assembly or LED Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 

Rear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 

Removing the Front Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 

Touch Panel Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 

LCD Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 

Inverter Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 

Removing the Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 

Removing the Touch Panel Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 

LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 

Switch Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 

Removing the Components (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 

MSR Assembly or LED Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 

Rear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 

Removing the Front Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 

Touch Panel Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 

LCD Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 

Inverter Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 

DC Jack Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 

Removing the Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 

LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 

Switch Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 

Disassembly and Assembly of the IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 

Conceptual Work Diagram for IM-800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 

Removing the IM-800 Rear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 

Removing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 

IM-800 Upper Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 

Removing the Compornents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 

Riser Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 

COM Port Circuit Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 

PCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 

RAID Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 

Riser Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 

CD/FDD Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 

CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 

FDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 

HDD bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 

3.5”HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 

2.5”HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 

DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 

System Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 

Switch cable assembly (218) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 

CPU Cooler and CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 

Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 

Main Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 

xvi 

Rev. I


Appendix A Jumper Settings 

IM-800 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 

2.5”HDD Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 

DM-M820 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2 

Jumper settings for the touch panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2 

LED of DM-M820 T/P board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2 

Appendix B Parts Information 

Part Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1 

Part List DM-M820-013/023/113/123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2 

DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Case Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3 

DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4 

DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Base Unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5 

Parts list DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Case Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Base unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-10 

Parts list DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-11 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Case Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-14 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Base unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15 

Parts list DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-16 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Case Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-18 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-19 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Base unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-20 

Parts list DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-21 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Case Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-23 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-24 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Base unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-25 

Parts list (IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-26 

IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-28 

Parts list (IM-800 24V model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-29 

IM-800 24V for 3.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-31 

Parts list (IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-32 

IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model Component Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-34 

Rev. I xvii

xviii 

Rev. I

Chapter 1 

Features and Overview 


Features 

The MR is a modular-type POS terminal consisting of a base unit, which is the IM-800, and a 

display unit, which is the DM-M820. The IM-800 and the DM-M820 are also sold separately. 

IM-800 Features 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

IBM ® PC/AT ® compatible 

Intel ® Celeron (FC-PGA/FC-PGA2 package) can be used. Either a 733 MHz or a 1.2 GHz 

Celeron is factory installed. 

Two 168-pin DIMM sockets are ready for installation of a maximum 512 MB of memory 

An LCD unit (DM-M820) exclusive to the MR can be connected 

A 3.5-inch floppy disk drive is available 

A 3.5-inch hard disk drive or two 2.5-inch hard disk drive is available 

A CD-ROM drive or CD-R/RW drive is available as a factory option 

An Ethernet controller for 10Base-T/100Base-TX is installed as standard equipment 

Four serial interface ports are provided 

One PCI slot is provided 

A power supply for a TM printer is provided (For the 24V model)*1 

Cables on the rear of the IM-800 can be covered by the included cable cover 

❏ A small footprint with maximum dimensions of 315 × 365 × 88 mm (W × D × H) {12.4 × 14.4 

× 3.5"} (including rear cover) 

DM-M820 Features 

*1 Applies only with the TM Printer Power Supply model. 

The DM-M820 is an LCD unit designed to be connected to an EPSON PC-POS system. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

800 × 600 dots resolution using a 12.1 inch color TFT LCD 

A tilt mechanism for easy positioning of the screen viewing angle 

A cable cover or a unified cable performs cable management effectively 

Display settings of the LCD and the brightness of the backlight can be adjusted. 

A stain-resistant touch panel is used.*1 

❏ Input by finger touch using the resistive film type of touch panel.*2 

❏ An MSR unit can read ISO/JIS Track 1, 2, or 3 (only for models with an MSR unit) *3 

Rev. I Features and Overview 1-1

❏ 

Power is supplied from the IM-800 or the OI-MR01 AC Adapter. The AC Adapter is used if 

the DM-M820 is bought by itself instead of with an IM-800. 

*1 Applies only to models with a stain-resistant Touch Panel. 

*2 Applies only to models with a Touch Panel. 

*3 Applies only to models with an MSR, which is sold only with the IM-800. 

Model Configurations 

IM-800 

The MR is composed of the IM-800 and the DM-M820. 

CPU 

HDD 

CD-ROM drive 

733MHz, 1.2GHz 

One 3.5" HDD, Two 2.5" HDDs 

CD-ROM drive, CD-R/RW drive, Without 

Power Supply For the standardmodel 145W ATX Power supply 

Power Supply 

Speaker 

Withe the TM Printer 

Power Supply model 

With, Without 

180W ATX Power supply with 24V 

Case Color 

Epson cool white, Epson dark glay 

DM-M820 

MSR 

Touch Panel 

Back light 

Case Color 

AC Adapter 

With, Without 

With, Without 

2 lights* 

Epson cool white, Epson dark glay 

With sold only the DM-M820 model 

* The OLD model has 1 light. 

The IM-800 and the DM-M820 are sold separately, but the DM-820 model with MSR is sold only 

with the IM-800. 

1-2 Features and Overview Rev. I


Part Names for IM-800 

Front view 

USB ports 

Ventilation 

opening 

CD/FDD 

cover 

Power 

switch 

Power 

LED 

HDD LED 

With CD/FDD cover open 

CD-ROM FDD LED 

drive(option) 

CD-ROM 

LED 

CD-ROM Eject 

eject button hole 

FDD unit 

FDD eject 

button 


Rear Cover 

Rear cover 

Rear view(Standard model) 

COM2 port PCI slot COM3 port DC 12V output 

(for DM-M820) 

AC voltage 

select switch 

Mouse COM1 port 

Keyboard LPT port 

Display 

port 

Ethernet 

port 

USB port 

Line-out 

output 

Line-in 

input 

Mic input 

COM4 port 

AC Inlet 

Rear view(24V model) 

DC 24V output 

(for TM printer) 

COM2 port 

PCI slot COM3 port 

DC 12V output 

Mouse COM1 port 

Keyboard LPT port 

Display 

port 

Ethernet 

port 

USB port 

Line-out 

output 

Line-in 

input 

Mic input 

COM4 port 

AC Inlet 



. 

Inside view(for the Standard model) 

Rear Side 

COM Port Circuit 

Board Assembly 

PCI card 

CPU 

Power Supply 

DIMM 

CD-ROM Drive 

HDD 

Speaker 

(for the Speaker model) 

Front Side 

FDD 

Inside view(for the 24V model) 

Rear Side 

COM Port Circuit 

Board Assembly 

PCI card 

CPU 

DC 24V Board 

Power Supply 

DIMM 

CD-ROM Drive 

HDD 

Speaker 

(for the Speaker model) 

Front Side 

FDD 


Part Names for DM-M820 

Model with MSR 

LCD / touch 

panel* 

Function 

control buttons 

Adjustment 

control 

Power switch 

Power-On LED 

Card Slot** 

MSR unit** 

LED for MSR** 

Model without MSR 

LCD / touch 

panel* 

Function 

control buttons 

Adjustment 

control 

Power switch 

Power-On LED 



Rear view 

LCD stand 

Stand tab 

Cable A / 

Cable B / 

Cable C / 

Cable A (with a touch panel and an MSR) 

Display 

connector 

DC plug 

Serial port 

connector 

PS/2 keyboard 

connector for IM-800 

PS/2 keyboard 

connector for keyboard 


Cable B (without a touch panel and an MSR) 

Display 

connector 

DC plug 

Cable C (with a touch panel, without an MSR) 

Serial port 

connector 

DC plug 

Display 

connecter 

. 

AC Adapter (OI-MR01) 

Power LED 

AC inlet 

DC plug 

* Applies only to models with a touch panel. 

** Applies only to models with an MSR. 



Specifications 

IM-800 

Item 


CPU Usable CPU types *1) Celeron 733 MHz or 1.2 GHz 

Socket 

370-pin socket 

Memory Main memory *2) 168-pin DIMM slots × 2 

3.3V PC100 SDRAM / Maximum 512MB 

BIOS ROM 

512KB 

Chipset 

Video controller 

IO controller 

Intel 810E2 chipset 

Built-in chipset 

Winbond W83627F (controls FDD, COM1/2, PS/2, and parallel 

interface) 

ITE IT8872F (controls COM3/4) 

Mass storage FDD One 3.5" floppy drive (1.44MB / 720KB) 

HDD 

One 3.5" HDD or Two 2.5" HDD 

IDE interface / Ultra DMA/33/66/100 

CD-ROM drive 

A CD-ROM or CD-R/RW optionally installed in factory, IDE 

interface, can be set as boot drive 

Interface LAN (Ethernet) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX is installed, "Wake On LAN" is 

supported. 

Interface Keyboard One PS/2-type (6-pin mini-DIN) 

Mouse 

Serial *3) 

Parallel 

Display 

USB *4) 

Audio 

DC12V output *5) *8) 

DC 24V output*8) 

One PS/2-type (6-pin mini-DIN) 

Four ports (9-pin D-sub male) 

+5V or +12V can be output to COM3 or COM4. 

One port (D-sub 25-pin female) SPP/EPP/ECP supported 

One port (D-sub 15-pin female) 

Two ports on the front and two ports on the rear. 

LINE IN, LINE OUT, microphone terminals 

One (+12V / 3A) for DM-M820 

One (+24V / 2A) for EPSON TM Printer 

Expansion slot PCI slot One slot (PCI version 2.2 compliant) 

Internal speaker *6) 

Audio function *6) 

Backup battery 

BIOS 

OS *7) 

Built-in monaural speaker 

AC'97 audio CODEC supported 

External line input/output, with a microphone terminal 

For the Lithium non-rechargeable battery the RTC and the 

RTC's built-in CMOS RAM when AC power is not supplied. 

Battery type: CR2032 

Battery life: Approximately 5 years 

ACPI 1.0b / APM 1.2 / Plug & Play / DMI 

Diagnostics Utility are supported 

MS-DOS, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP 


Item 


Lithium battery 

The IM-800 is internally equipped with a Lithium non-rechargeable 

battery that supplies the backup voltage to the RTC and the RTC's builtin 

CMOS RAM when AC power is not supplied. The battery can be 

exchanged easily because the battery is connected through the 

socket. 


Battery life: Approximately 5 years 

Power supply 

Standard 

model 

Input voltage *8) 

145W ATX power supply is built in 

AC input voltage can be changed with a switch. 

Low range: 100-127 VAC / 3.5 A (max.) 

High range: 200-240 VAC / 2 A (max.) 

Frequency 

50 / 60 Hz 

24V 

model 

Input voltage *8) 

180W ATX power supply is built in 

100-127 VAC / 4 A (max.) 

200-240 VAC / 2 A (max.) 

Frequency 

50 / 60 Hz 

Case Size 315(W) × 280(D) × 88(H) mm (excluding the rear cover) 

{12.4 × 11 × 3.5"} 

315(W) × 365(D) × 88(H) mm (including the rear cover) 

{12.4 × 14.4 × 3.5"} 

Color 

Epson cool white 

Epson dark gray 

Environmental 

conditions 

Condition: Operating range Storage range 

Temperature: 5 to 35°C {41 to 95°F} –10 to 50°C {14 to 122°F} 

Humidity (RH): 30 to 80% non-condensing 30 to 90% non-condensing 

*1: The Celeron (533 MHz or less) with a PPGA package is not supported. 

*2: ECC is not supported. 

*3: If the COM3/4 is used, you need to install the serial driver from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

*4: The USB interface is not supported with MS-DOS, or Windows NT. (The keyboard or mouse is supported with the BIOS.) 

*5: The LCD outlet must not be connected to a peripheral other than the DM-M820.· 

*6: The internal speaker is not supported by the onboard sound controller.(There is a model that can output sound through the 

internal speaker.) 

*7: There are some limitations with each OS. Refer to Chapter 4 “OS and Drivers.” 

*8: A switch to cut the AC power off is not available. 



DM-M820 

Item 

Specification 

LCD Size 12.1" 

Type 

Resolution 

Color 

Input signal 

Scanning frequency 

Dot clock frequency 

Color TFT 

800 × 600 dots 

262,144 colors 

(Can emulate 16 M color display using the dithering 

function) 

0.7V p-p, 75 ohm 

Horizontal 24 to 69KHz, Vertical 50 to 85 Hz 

Max. 80MHz 

View angle 

Horizontal 

direction 

From the left 45º (typ.) to the right 45º (typ.) 

Vertical direction 

From the top 30º (typ.) to the bottom 10º (typ.) 

Backlight 

Old Backlight 

Standard model 

Number of lamps 

Brightness 

1 lamp 

150 cd/m 2 min. (except touch panel) 

100 cd/m 2 min. (including touch panel) 

Life 

20,000 hours or more (at 25 ± 5°C {77 ± 9°F}) 

Initial brightness reduced to half 

Backlight 


(Old Backlight 

High brightness 

model) 

Number of lamps 

Brightness 

Life 

2 lamp 

275 cd/m 2 min. (except touch panel) 

50,000 hours or more (at 25 ± 5°C {77 ± 9°F}) 

Initial brightness reduced to half 

Touch panel*1 Method Resistive film (touch with finger) 

Surface solidity 

Positioning accuracy 

3H or more (JIS K-5400) 

±1.5 % maximum 

MSR*2 Supported cards ISO 7811, JIS X6301 Type I tracks 1, 2, 3 

Reading direction 

Supporting MSR firmware 

Bidirectional 

Ver 3.04 or later 

External interface 

DC Jack, Serial port connector*1, Display connector, 

PS/2 connectors × 2 (for a PS/2 keyboard and the IM- 

800)*2 

Indicator With an MSR POWER LED, LED for MSR 

Without an MSR 

AC Adapter 

POWER LED 

POWER LED 

Power supply 

+12V (supplied through the DC cable from the IM-800 

or AC Adapter OI-MR01) 

Tilting angle From 0º to 90º 

Case color 

Epson cool white 

Epson dark gray 

Dimensions 320 × 340 × 200 mm (W × H × D) {12.6 × 13.4 × 7.9"} 


Item 

Mass 

Specification 

Approximately 5.0 kg {3.3 lb} 

Environmental conditions Condition: Operating range Storage 

range 

Temperature: 5 to 35°C {41 to 95°F} –10 to 50°C 

{14 to 122°F} 

Humidity (RH): 30 to 80% non-condensing 30 to 90% 

non-condensing 

The unit is not water resistant. 

Others 

Connection to the IM-800 through an exclusive DC 

cable. 

A button on the right side of the panel lets you adjust 

the backlight brightness. 

*1 Applies only to models with a touch panel. 

*2 Applies only to models with an MSR unit. 

AC Adapter (OI-MR01)* 

Item 

Input 

Frequency 

Output 

Protection 

function 

Over voltage protection 

function 

Circuit breaker 

Specification 

90 -264 VAC / 1.5 A (max.) 

47 -63 Hz 

12VDC / 3 A (max.) 

Built-in 

Manual reset 

Dimensions 110 × 62 × 33 mm (W × H × D) {4.3× 2.4 × 1.3"} 

* The AC Adapter is used if the DM-M820 without MSR model is used without an IM-800. 



Dimensions 

IM-800 

Dimensions: 

315 (W) × 280 (D) × 88 (H) mm {12.4 × 11 × 3.5"} (excluding the rear cover) 

315 (W) × 365 (D) × 88 (H) mm {12.4 × 14.4 × 3.5"} (including the rear cover) 

280 

365 

88 

(excluding the rubber feet) 

[Units : mm] 

315 

DM-M820 

340 mm 

250 mm 

200 mm 

305 mm 

320 mm 


Underside of Base 

The dotted circle is the position and size of the hole in the table required if the DM-M820 is 

mounted on a table with the cable going down rather than out of the back of the LCD stand. 

102 

70 

50 

200 

240 


Chapter 2 

Setup for the IM-800 and the DM-M820 


Setting the AC Voltage for the IM-800 (For the Standard model) 

If you are using 100-127 V power, set the AC 

voltage switch to 115. If you are using 200-240 V 

power, set the AC voltage switch to 230. (The 

factory setting is 230.) If the setting is wrong, 

the system will be damaged and will not 

operate. 

Follow these steps: 

1. Remove the warning sheet. 

2. Set the AC voltage select switch. 

IM-800 Installation Positions 

You can install the unit in either of the positions shown. 

The rubber feet are used only when the unit is installed 

horizontally. Attach the rubber feet to the indentations on 

the bottom of the unit. 

WARNING: 

If you set this product upright, be sure the ventilation opening is on the top. Do not place 

any object on top of the ventilation opening. If the ventilation opening is blocked, the 

product can be damaged by overheating. 

If you install this product horizontally, never place any object within 3 cm {1.2"} of the 

ventilation openings on the front, side, and rear. If the ventilation opening is blocked, 

the product can be damaged by overheating. 

Rev. I Setup for the IM-800 and the DM-M820 2-1

If the IM-800 is placed horizontally with the rear cover installed, attach the rubber feet 

that are included or leave at least 1 cm {0.4"} of space from the bottom of the rear 

cover. 

Installing face 

1cm or more 

Do not put anything that weighs more than 20 kg {44 lb} on the IM-800 when it is installed 

horizontally. 

Installing the DM-M820 

Cable Arrangement 

When you plan your installation of the DM-M820, consider the cable that comes out of the base. 

There are two ways you can arrange the cable: 

❏ 

❏ 

Make a hole in the surface on which you will place the unit and run the cable through the 

hole (A in the illustration below). 

Remove the tab from the back of the LCD stand and run the cable out of the back of the LCD 

stand (B in the illustration below). 

B 

A 

CAUTION: 

If burrs are left after the tabs are removed, they may cause cuts or scratches. Remove 

the burrs with a nipper or file. 

2-2 Setup for the IM-800 and the DM-M820 Rev. I


Connecting the DM-M820 

Be sure to unplug the power cable for the IM-800 or PC before you connect the cables for the 

DM-M820. 

Connectors on the IM-800 

Serial port connectors 

DC plug 

Keyboard out 

Display connector 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with a Touch Panel and MSR 

❏ DC plug Connects to the 12 VDC output of the IM-800. 

❏ Display connector Connects to the display port of the IM-800. 

❏ 

Serial port connector Connects to the touch panel COM1 or COM2 port. 

Note: 

If you are using a DM-M820 with a touch panel, be sure to connect the serial port connector to 

COM1 or COM2. Do not use COM3 or COM4. 

Also if you are using a DM-M820 with a touch panel, do not install a mouse driver. Installing a 

mouse driver can prevent the touch panel from working. 

❏ Keyboard out Connects the keyboard out to the IM-800 keyboard port. 

Note: 

Be sure not to connect to the mouse port. 

❏ Keyboard in If you are using an external PS/2 keyboard, connect it to the keyboard 

in connector. 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with a Touch Panel and without an MSR 

❏ DC plug Connect to the 12 VDC output on the IM-800 or the AC adapter 

(OI-MR01). 

❏ Display connector Connect to the display port on the IM-800 or PC. 

❏ 

Serial port connector Connect to the COM port for the touch panel on the IM-800 or PC. 


Note: 

If you are using a DM-M820 with a touch panel, be sure to connect the serial port connector to 

COM1 or COM2. Do not use COM3 or COM4. 

Also if you are using a DM-M820 with a touch panel, do not install a mouse driver. Installing a 

mouse driver can prevent the touch panel from working. 

Connector Cables for a DM-M820 with No Touch Panel and No MSR 

❏ DC plug Connect to the 12 VDC output of the IM-800 or AC adapter 

(OI-MR01). 

❏ Display connector Connect to the display port of the IM-800 or PC. 

Connecting the Power Cable for AC Adapter 

Be sure to push the end of the power cable all the way into the AC inlet. The fitting on the power 

cable should make contact with the back of the inlet. 

CAUTION: 

Do not use the DC plug on a system other than the IM-800 or the OI-MR01 (AC adapter). 

The DC plug on the exclusive cable is designed only for the IM-800 or the OI-MR01 (AC 

adapter). 

IM-800 Connectors 

The illustration below shows all the connectors on the back of the IM-800. In addition, there are 

two USB connectors on the front. (See Chapter 1.) 

Be sure to unplug the power cable from the IM-800 before you connect these cables. 


COM2 PCI slot COM3 12 VDC output 

for DM-M820 

Mouse 

COM1 

Display 

Line-out 

Line-in 

Mic input 

AC Inlet 

Keyboard 

LPT 

Ethernet 

USB 

COM4 



With the TM Printer Power Supply model 

COM2 PCI slot COM3 12 VDC output 

for DM-M820 

Mouse 

COM1 

Display 

Line-out 

Line-in 

Mic input 

AC Inlet 

Keyboard 

LPT 

Ethernet 

COM4 

USB 

Connecting Other Peripheral Devices to the IM-800 

These are general instructions for the types of peripherals you may want to use. 

CAUTION: 

The12 VDC output is an exclusive power supply for the DM-M820. Do not use it for other 

peripheral devices. 

Serial Device Information 

If you use COM3 or COM4, you must install the serial driver from the driver CD-ROM for the 

IM-800, included with the IM-800. 

Either + 5 V or +12 V can be output to COM3 or COM4. See Appendix A, “Jumper Settings.” 

Connecting a Serial Modem to the IM-800 

If you are using a serial modem with the IM-800, be sure to connect the modem to COM1 or 

COM2. Do not use COM3 or COM4. 

USB Device Information 

There are four USB ports, two on the front and two on the back. 

You cannot use USB devices if you are using either MS-DOS or Windows NT. 


Keyboard and Mouse 

To use a USB keyboard or mouse under MS-DOS or Windows NT, set USB keyboard support or 

USB mouse support in the Integral Peripheral section of the BIOS setup. 

Using a PS/2 mouse 

To use a PS/2 mouse, you must be sure that USB mouse support in the Integrated 

Peripheral section of the BIOS is set to Disabled (which is the factory setting). 

TM-Printer 

Use the dedicated power supply for the power supply of the TM-Printer. (For the standard 

model) 

Connect the power supply of the TM-Printer to the DC24V Output using the DC cable. (For the 

24V model) 

PCI Cards 

See the PCI information in Chapter 3, “Hardware Specifications,” and Chapter 9, “Disassembly 

and Assembly.” 

Connecting the Power Cable 

When AC power is supplied, a minute electric current flows through the IM-800. Therefore, 

before connecting peripherals and cables to this product, unplug the AC cord. 

WARNING: 


shock. 




The equipment must be installed near the electrical outlet, and the outlet must be easily 

accessible. 

Be sure your power cable meets the relevant safety standards and includes a power 

system ground terminal (PE terminal). 



Attaching the Rear Cover 

The rear cover makes the back of the system look neat and protects the cables. 

1. When you want the cables to exit the top of the rear cover, use pliers to break out the tabs. 

CAUTION: 

If burrs are left after the tabs are removed, they may cause cuts or scratches. 

Remove the burrs with a cutter or file. 

2. Remove the screw from the lower right corner of the back of the unit. 

3. Fit the tabs on the rear cover as shown below. 

tabs 

4. Attach with three screws, including the one you removed, in the locations shown below. 




Chapter 3 

Hardware Specifications 

Hardware Block Diagram for IM-800 

Main Board 

I2C Bus 

Clock 

Generator 

ICS9248-9 

6 

66/100/133 MHz 

S-DRAM 

PC100 

DIMM 168 

Pins X 2 

CPU 

Socket 370 

HOST Bus 

810E 

GMCH 

(North Bridge) 

82810E 

VRM 8.5 

DC/DC 

ISL6524 

HDD Power 

FDD Power 

CD Power 

DC Jack Power 

VGA 

CRT 

ATX Power 

Supply Unit 

24V 

Output 

ATX 20 Pins 

Power Connector 

Power Button 

Power/HDD LED 

RTC 

Battery 

I2C Bus 

Hub Link 

ICH2 

(South Bridge) 

FW82801BA 

USB Port 0 

USB Port 1 

USB Port 2 

USB Port 3 

USB 

USB 

Pin 

Header 

Rear 

USB 

USB 

BOX Header 

Front 

RJ-45 

& LED 

PHY 

82562ET 

MAC 

PCI Bus 

PCI Bus 

MIC 

L_Out 

L_In 

CODEC 

AD1887 

AC Link 

Riser Board Slot 

FWH (BIOS) 

Firmware Hub 

512K Byte 

49LF004 

/ 82802AB 

ATA-33/66/100 

Primary IDE 

Secondary IDE 

SPKR 

1st IDE 

2nd IDE 

Low Profile 

PCI Slot 

Riser Board 

Standard 

PCI Slot 

FWH 

COM Board 

Keyboard 

Mouse 

COM1 

LPC Interface 

PS-2 Keyboard 

PS-2 Mouse 

COM 1 

LPC 

Super I/O 

Winbond 

W83627F 

QFP-128 

Beep 

Floppy 

Parallel 

Speaker 

FDD 

LPT 

+12V 

COM 3 

+5V 

ITE 

PCI 

Bridge 

+12V 

IT8872F COM 4 

+5V 

COM2 

COM 2 

CPU Fan 

System Fan 

+12V DC 

Jack for 

LCD 

Rev. I Hardware Specifications 3-1

DMA 

The IM-800 supports seven DMA channels. Channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 provide 8-bit data transfers; 

channels 4, 5, 6, and 7 provide 16-bit data transfers. The IM-800 uses channel 2 for the floppy 

disk drive controller and releases the other channels to the other devices. The following table 

lists the DMA channel allocation. 

DMA channels 

Controller Channel Application 

DMA1 8 bits 0 (Spare) 

1 (Spare*) 

2 Floppy disk drive controller 

3 (Spare*) 

DMA2 16 bits 4 Controller 1 cascade 

5 (Spare) 

6 (Spare) 

7 (Spare) 

* When LPT1 is in ECP mode, use one of these channels. 

System Interrupts 

The system connects 2 8259A-equivalent interrupt controllers in cascade and has 15 levels of 

interrupts, besides NMIs. The following table shows the application for each interrupt. Change 

the system interrupts with the BIOS setup program or Plug & Play function. 

System interrupts 

Controller 1 Controller 2 Application Changeable? 

IRQ0 Timer NO 

IRQ1 Keyboard NO 

IRQ2 Controller 2 cascade NO 

IRQ8 RTC NO 

IRQ9 Not used * 1 OK 

IRQ10 Not used *1 OK 


IRQ12 Mouse NO 

IRQ13 Numerical operation coprocessor NO 

IRQ14 IDE controller (primary) * 2 

IRQ15 IDE controller (secondary) * 2 

IRQ3 Serial port 2 OK 

IRQ4 Serial port 1 OK 


IRQ6 Floppy disk controller NO * 3 

IRQ7 Parallel port 1 OK 

NMI I/O error check NO 

* 1 PCI (for example, network) is automatically set through the detection of the unused interrupt level. If Serial port 3/ 

4 is used with Windows, use an unused interrupt level. If Serial port 3/4 is used with DOS, Serial port 3 is set to IRQ11 

and Serial port 4 is set to IRQ10 automatically. 

* 2 Changes are not possible when the device is in use, but can be cleared when not in use. 

* 3 This can be set to “Not used” in the BIOS setup, but the IRQ is not released. 

3-2 Hardware Specifications Rev. I


Configuration of Circuit Boards 

Main Board 

Mouse 

Keyboard 

CPU Fan 

Connector 

System Fan 

Connector 

ATX Connector 

Power Switch 

Connector 

BIOS 

LED 

Connector 

Parallel 

COM1 

CRT 

CPU 

Socket 

(370-pin) 

FDD 

LAN 

USB x2 

Line-Out 

Line-In 

Mic-In 

COM2 

Header 

DIMM Sockets 

Secondary IDE 

Primary IDE 

CD Audio 

Header 

JP15 

Front USB 

Header 

JP10 

Riser Card Slot 

Speaker 

Connector 

Speaker 

RTC Battery 

COMS CLEAR Jumper 


Riser Board 

PCI Slot 

COM Board Slot 

COM Board 

DC12V Input 

Connector 

JP2 JP1 

COM3 

DC12V 

Jack 

COM4 

Header 

DC24V Board 

DC24V Jack 

DC24V Input 

Connector 

PCI Slot 

CAUTION: 

Before using a PCI card, it is your responsibility to examine it carefully to confirm whether 

its specifications conform to the specifications described in this manual. 

To get the latest information about which PCI board can be used with this product, 

contact your EPSON dealer. 

The PCI slot is located on the riser board. 



The dimensions of installable PCI cards are shown below: 

210 

 

Maximum height of parts: 14.48 

(maximum) 

106.68 

Maximum height of parts on the soldering face: 

2.67 (maximum) 

[Units:mm] 

Power Supply 

The IM-800 has an ATX power supply that switches the AC input by AC voltage select switch 

and does not have a switch to cut off the AC input. 


Input voltage: 

Input frequency: 

Input current: 

Cooling fan: 

MTBF: 

Low range 100 - 127 VAC (90 - 137 VAC) 

High range 200 - 240 VAC (180 - 265 VAC) 

50 ± 3 Hz / 60 ± 3 Hz 

3.5 A maximum (100 - 127 VAC) 

2 A maximum (200 - 240 VAC) 

Air intake type, fan rotation speed is automatically changed, depending on 

the temperature in the power supply unit. 

200,000 hours 

Precautions: 

1) Setting the AC input voltage switch improperly causes the following problems: 

If you use 100-127 V power when the switch is set to 230, the IM-800 will not operate, but if you 

change the setting to 115, the unit will operate. 

If you use 200-240 V power when the switch is set to 115, the voltage power unit will be 

damaged. 

2) When the protective circuit of the voltage power unit performs a shutdown, the protective 

circuit keeps working for a while. When this happens, unplug the power cable and wait for 

about 15 seconds; then plug the cable back in. 


24V model 

Input voltage/current: 

Input frequency: 

Cooling fan: 

depending on 

MTBF: 

100 - 127 VAC / 4A 

200 - 240 VAC / 2A 

50 ± 3 Hz / 60 ± 3 Hz 

Air intake type, fan rotation speed is automatically changed, 

the temperature in the power supply unit. 

200,000 hours 

Precautions: 

2) When the protective circuit of the voltage power unit performs a shutdown, the protective 

circuit keeps working for a while. When this happens, unplug the power cable and wait for 

about 15 seconds; then plug the cable back in. 

Power supply capacity for external devices 

Total power available to devices connected to the interface boards in the PCI slot, COM3/4, 

keyboard/mouse, and USB are as follows. Current drain must not exceed the capacity shown 

for each supply voltage: +5V, +3.3V, +12V, and -12V. 

Power supply Used for Capacity 

+5 VDC PCI slot, COM ports, keyboard/mouse, USB 2.0 A 

+3.3 VDC PCI slot 1.0 A 

+12 VDC PCI slot, COM ports 1.0 A 

-12 VDC PCI slot 0.02 A 

Each port has the following current limitation: 

Power Supply Capacities to Each Port 

Port Voltage Current supply capacity Remarks 

COM port +5 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1 A/100 ms) Total current of +5 

+12 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1 A/100 ms) 

VDC and +12 VDC 

must not exceed the 

value shown at left. 

USB port +5 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1 A/100 ms) -- 

Keyboard and mouse +5 VDC 500 mA (peak 1A / 100 ms) -- 

Power Supply for 24V model +24 VDC 2A (peak 1A / 100 ms) -- 



Lithium Battery 

The IM-800 is internally equipped with a Lithium non-rechargeable battery, which supplies the 

backup voltage to the RTC and the RTC's built-in CMOS RAM (only when the AC power is not 

supplied). The battery can be exchanged easily because the battery is connected through the 

socket. 


Vendor: 

Sony, Maxell, Toshiba 

Battery life: 

Approximately 5 years 

When replacing batteries, be sure to use the types and manufacturers listed above. 

MAC Address 

The MAC address label is attached on the LPT connector of the main board. 




Chapter 4 

OS and Drivers 

Outline of This Chapter 

This chapter tells which Operating Sytems and Drivers can be used and how to install and 

uninstall them. 

CAUTION: 

Don’t write anything, such as an application to an HDD that is removed from the MR. 

The vibration and impact can cause trouble and the failure of the HDD. 

Operating Systems 

The following Operating Systems can be used for the IM-800. 

❏ 

❏ 

Windows 2000 Professional (There is a version preinstalled by EPSON) 

Windows XP Professional 

❏ Windows 98SE (There is a version preinstalled by EPSON) 

❏ 

❏ 

Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a 

MS-DOS Ver.6.22 

Drivers and Utilities 

Drivers for using the IM-800 are on the Driver CD-ROM included with the IM-800. If the 

operating system is pre-installed, the drivers are also installed. 

MSR utilities for the DM-M820 with MSR are on the Driver CD-ROM included with the IM-800, 

and if the operating system is pre-installed, the utilities are on the HDD. Set up the MSR using 

the utilities. 

Touch panel drivers for the DM-M820 with touch panel are on the touch panel driver CD-ROM 

for the DM-M820. Even if the operating system is preinstalled, you must install the touch panel 

drivers. 

Rev. I OS and Drivers 4-1

Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 

The driver for installing a locally procured OS on the IM-800, the MSR utility for using the MSR 

of the DM-M820, and drivers for using the peripheral devices are on this CD-ROM. 

The CD-ROM directory is shown below. 

Root 

CDVER.TAG 

|--- DOS62 Drivers for MS-DOS 

| |--- Cdrom : CD-ROM drivers 

| |--- Network : Network drivers 

| |--- Serial : Serial drivers 

|--- WIN98 Drivers for Windows98 

| |--- Chipset : Chipset drivers 



| |--- Sound : Sound drivers 

| |---Video : Video drivers 

|--- WINNT Drivers for Windows NT 





|--- WIN2K Drivers for Windows2000 

| |--- Chipset : Chipset drivers 





|--- WINXP Drivers for Windows XP 


|--- COMMON Common OS utility drivers 

|--- Apdrv : Advanced Printer Drivers 

|--- Oposadk : OPOS-ADK 

|--- TmDrv : UniMini Drivers 

|--- MSRCFG : DM-MS Definition tool 

|--- WIN : 

|--- DISK1 : 

|--- DOS : 

Readme.txt files are in both the root directory and in subdirectories of the root directory. 

1. The Readme.txt file in the root directory contains an overview of this CD-ROM, and 

refers to the Readme.txt files in the various subdirectories. 

2. The Readme.txt files in the operating system subdirectories explain driver installation/ 

un-installation for each operating system. 

3. Readme.txt files for MSRCFG, OPOS-ADK, and APDRV are included with the software. 

4-2 OS and Drivers Rev. I

Touch Panel driver CD-ROM for the DM-M820 touch panel model 

The CD-ROM directory is shown below. 


Root 

CDVER.TAG 

|--- DOS Touch Panel Driver for MS-DOS 

|--- WIN--- European Touch Panel Driver for Windows98/NT/2000/XP for European 

|--- Asian Touch Panel Driver for Windows98/NT/2000/XP for Chinese T/ 

C,Korean 

Readme.txt files are in both the root directory and in subdirectories beneath the root directory. 

1. The Readme.txt file in the root directory contains an overview of this CD-ROM, and 

refers to the Readme.txt files in the various subdirectories. 

2. The Readme.txt files under the operating system subdirectories explain driver 

installation/un-installation for each operating system. 


Windows 2000 Pre-Installed Model 

The exclusive EPSON utility and drivers for using IM-800 are pre-installed in the HDD with the 

pre-installed Windows 2000 Professional. 

Installation Procedure 

Windows 2000 Installation 

When turning on the power supply, the installation starts. Enter the product 

key of the W2K label pasted on the product. You can set up the Network 

automatically or set it up later. 

When using the DM-M820 with Touch Panel, follow the steps as below. 

Touch Panel Driver Installation 

Install the Touch Panel Driver from the CD-ROM for the DM-M820. See 

page 4-45 for the procedure. 

Change of Double click settings 

Set up this setting every time a new user starts using Windows 2000. 

MSR Utility Installation 

When using the DM-M820 with MSR, install the MSR utilities from 

C:\backup\msrcfg folder or the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

Other software Installation 

When using OPOS-ADK, APD (Windows printer drivers) and Unimini, 

install the software from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

Formatting the hard disk 

The hard disk is composed of one partition of up to 10 GB as a system area. For a hard disk of 

more than 10 GB, the excess area other than the system area, is not yet formatted. This drive can 

be converted to NTFS using the Convert command. Use the disk administrator when creating a 

drive in the unused area. The start-up drive has been formatted to the following file system. 

• File system: FAT32 

• Volume label: Windows 2000 



Pre-installed software 

❏ Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 

❏ Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Multilingual User Interface (French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese) 

Intel Chipset software installation utility 

Intel Video driver 

Intel Network driver 

Analog Devices Sound driver 

ITE COM3/4 Driver 

❏ EPSON DM-MS Series setup utility *1 

Version of the Pre-installation HDD 

To confirm the version of the HDD, see the file HDVER.TAG at the root directory of the boot 

drive. This file is text-formatted and can be read using Notepad or a similar text editor. The file 

HDVER.TAG has the following contents: 

[HD Information] 

MODEL=IM-800 

OS=Windows2000 

LANG=Dutch/English/French/German/Italian/Portuguese/Spanish 

VER=1.**.* 


Directory Configuration 

The root directory of the HDD is structured as follows. 

|--- Backup 

| |--- Msrcfg : Backup of MSR Utility 

| | |--- Win : 

| | | |--- Disk1 : Backup of MSR Utility for Windows 

| | |--- DOS : Backup of MSR Utility for MS-DOS 

| |--- Chipset : Chipset driver backup folder 

| | |--- Win2000 : 

| |--- Network : Network driver backup folder 

| |--- Recovery : Recovery folder 

| |--- Serial : Serial port driver backup folder 

| |--- Sound : Sound driver backup folder 

| |--- Video : Video driver backup folder 

| |--- Win2ksp2 : Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 backup folder 

|--- BOOTDISK : Folder for files used to create an ordinary boot floppy disk 

|--- Documents and Settings: Folder for saving text and settings. 

|--- I386 : Setup file folder 

|--- Mui : 

|--- Program Files : Windows utility folders 

|--- WINNT : Windows folders 

The I386 directory may be deleted after the addition of the Windows 2000 application and the 

addition / change of the driver. 

The directories under the Backup directory are the backups for drivers and utilities. Each of 

these directories can be backed up into CD-R or other media. After being backed up, these 

directories may be deleted. 

Windows 2000 Setup Procedure 

CAUTION 

Because the touch panel is not operative during the setup procedure, be sure to keep 

the keyboard connected. If necessary, start the setup procedure after connecting the 

mouse. 

The keyboard is necessary for inputting the product ID and password. The keyboard is 

also necessary for user verification during logon to Windows 2000, even if the touch 

panel is in a usable state. 

Windows 2000 is setup by using the following procedure. 

1. Turn on the system, and boot the system from the pre-installation HDD. Windows 2000 

setup will start. 

2. The License Agreement screen is displayed. Check the contents, then select [I accept this 

agreement] and click Next. 



3. The Regional Settings screen is displayed. Make sure the system locale, user locales and 

keyboard layout are set to United States, then click Next. 

4. The Personalize Your Software screen is displayed. Input the Name and Organization, then 

click Next. 

5. The Your Product Key screen is displayed. Input the product key entered on the cover of the 

First Step Guide in the COA (Certificate of Authenticity) package included with this 

product; then click Next. 

6. The Computer Name and Administrator Password screen is displayed. Input the Computer 

Name and Administrator Password, then click Next. 

7. The Date and Time Settings screen is displayed. Set the date and time, then click Next. 

8. The Networking Settings screen is displayed. Select either Typical Settings or Custom 

Settings according to the environment, then click Next. The Networking Components screen 

is displayed if Custom Settings is selected. Set the settings in accordance with the 

environment, then click Next. 

9. The Workgroup or Computer Domain screen is displayed. Set the settings in accordance 

with the environment, then click Next. 

The Performing Final Tasks screen is displayed, and setup starts. 

10. The Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard screen is displayed. The system will start 

automatically when Finish is clicked. 

11. The Network Identification Wizard starts. Click Next. 

12. The Users of this Computer screen is displayed. Set the settings in accordance with the 

environment, then click Next. 

13. The Completing the Network Identification Wizard screen is displayed. Click Finish. 

14. Windows 2000 starts and the setup is completed. 

CAUTION: 

The setup is executed with the VGA display. 

Change of double click settings 

When you set up Windows 2000 and create a new user, you have to modify the registry key for 

individual users by following the steps below. 

Note 

The touch panel driver is not installed with the Operating System. After installing it from the touch panel 

driver CD-ROM for the DM-M820, set it up as follows. 

1. Select Programs - Gunze - U-TP - Settings in that order from the Start menu. 


2. Pointer Device Properties is displayed. Click the Windows tab. 

3. Click the Defaults button on the Double Click Settings group box. 

4. Click OK. 

Installing the MSR Utility for Windows 

Install the MSR Utility by the following procedure. 

1. Start C:\Backup\Msrcfg\ Win\Disk1\SETUP.EXE. 

2. The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

3. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. Specify the directory where the 

program is to be installed and click Next. C:\Program Files\MSR Config is specified as the 

default. 

4. Installing is completed, and the Setup dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

Uninstalling the MSR utility for Windows 

Uninstall the MSR Utility by the following procedure. 

1. Select [Start Menu] - [Settings] and open the control panel. 

2. Select [Add/Remove Hardware] in the control panel. 

3. Select [DM-MS Series Configuration Utilities]. 

4. Click Add/Remove. 

5. The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed. Select Yes. 

6. Uninstalling is completed, and the dialog box is displayed. Click OK. 


Recovering the OS 


Use the OS recovery media (CD-ROM) packed with the IM-800 to recover the OS. 

Follow the steps below to carry out OS recovery. 

1. Turn power to the IM-800 off. Turn the main power switch off. Unplug the power cable. 

2. If a CD-ROM drive is not already installed, attach a drive to the MR series. 

3. Attach to the MR series the HDD unit you'd like to recover. 

4. Start up the BIOS setup utility and select the First Boot Device from the Advanced BIOS 

features setup menu. 

5. Set the First Boot Device to “CDROM”. 

6. Insert the “Windows 2000 CD-ROM 1 of 2" into the CD-ROM drive. 

7. On the BIOS setup utility main menu, select “Save & Exit Setup” and press the Enter key. 

The following dialog box appears. 

SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)? 

8. Press [Y] and [Enter]. The system will restart and after a short time, the License Agreement 

will appear. 

Strike a key when ready ... _ 

9. When you press any key, part of the License Agreement will appear. Repeat the same 

procedure until you get to the end of the License Agreement. The following message will 

appear. 

Please type following commands to start the OS recovery. 

A:\>_ 

10. Enter the following from the command prompt. 

A:\>x: [enter] 

X:\>start [enter] 

11. The following message will appear. Select and enter the partition size of the HDD. 

Please select the system partition size. 

1: 10GB (Default size) 

F: Full size of HD. 

Please push a key of 1 or F._ 

12. EPSON HDD Recovery Utility window will appear. Press Continue to start the OS 

recovery. 

OS recovery takes 20 to 40 minutes. The time differs depending on the type of OS and CPU 

speed. 


13. The image data exchange dialog will appear. Insert the Windows 2000 CD-ROM 2 of 2 in the 

CD-ROM drive; then press the OK button. 

14. When the prompt below is displayed on the screen, OS recovery work is complete. 

X:\>_ 

15. Eject the “Windows 2000 CD-ROM” from the CD-ROM drive. 

16. Reboot and start the BIOS setup utility. 

17. Return the First Boot Device in the Advanced BIOS features setup menu to the “Floppy”. 

18. On the main menu, select “Save & Exit Setup” and press the Enter key. The following dialog 

box appears. 

SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N) ? 

19. Press [Y] and [Enter]. The system will restart. 

20. Make sure the OS restarts. When using Windows, cancel work after the setup screen and 

end Windows. 

21. If a CD-ROM drive unit is attached in step 2., power off and detach the CD-ROM drive. 

Limitation 

❏ If you are starting from a hard disk, recovery cannot be performed. Be sure to perform 

recovery from the CD-ROM. 



Windows 98 Pre-Installed Model 

The HDD pre-installed with Windows 98 Second Edition is also pre-installed with the EPSON 

utility software and drivers dedicated to the IM-800. 

Languages are English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. 



When turning on the power supply, the installation starts. Enter the product 

key of the W98 label pasted on the product. You can setup the Network 

automatically or setup it later. 


In the case of the DM-M820 with Touch Panel, install the Touch Panel Driver 

from the CD-ROM for the DM-M820. See page 4-45 for the procedure. 


When using the DM-M820 with MSR, install the MSR utilities from 

C:\backup\msrcfg folder or the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 




Formatting the hard disk 

The hard disk is composed of one partition of up to 10 GB as a system area. For a hard disk of 

more than 10 GB, the excess area other than the system area is not yet formatted. Use the FDISK 

and FORMAT command when creating a drive in the unused area. The start-up drive has been 

formatted to the following file system. 

• File system: FAT32 

• Volume label: Windows 98 

Pre-installed software 

❏ Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition 

❏ 

Intel Chipset software installation utility 


❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Intel Video driver 

Intel Network driver 

Analog Devices Sound driver 

ITE COM3/4 Driver 

❏ EPSON DM-MS Series setup utility *1 

Note: 

*1: These are not installed during the auto installation procedure. 

Version of the pre-installation HDD 

To confirm the version of the HDD, see HDVER.TAG in the start-up drive root. This file is textformatted 

and can be read using Notepad or a similar text editor. The contents of HDVER.TAG 

are as follows: 

[HD Information] 

MODEL=IM-800 

OS= Windows98 

LANG=English 

VER=1.**.* 

Directory Configuration 

The root directory of the HDD is structured as follows: 

|--- Program Files : Application for the standard installation of Windows 98 

|--- Backup : 

| |--- Msrcfg : Backup of MSR Utility 

| | |--- Win : 

| | | |--- Disk1 : Backup of MSR Utility for Windows 

| | |--- DOS : Backup of MSR Utility for MS-DOS 

| |--- Chipset : Backup of Chipset driver 

| |--- Video : Backup of Display Driver 

| |--- Sound : Backup of Sound Driver 

| |--- Network : Backup of Network Driver 

| |--- Serial : Backup of Serial Driver 

| |--- Recovery : 

| |--- Data : Backup of HD (for creating Recovery Media) 

| | |--- Restore : EasyRestore 

| |--- Bootfd : Start-up FD 

| |--- Data : Data of Start-up FD 

|--- My Documents : 

|--- Windows : Windows 98 Second Edition system 

The directories under the Backup directory are the backups for drivers and utilities. Each of 

these directories can be backed up onto CD-R or other media. After backup, the directories 

under the Backup directory may be deleted. 



Windows 98 Set-Up Procedure 

Windows 98 is set up by using the following procedure: 

1. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the IM-800. 

2. Turn on the PC to start Windows 98 SE. 

3. The Enter Network Password dialog box is displayed. Input the password and click OK. 

4. The Welcome screen is displayed. Input the necessary information and click Next. 

5. The Windows End User license Agreement is displayed. Read it though and confirm your 

agreement to the terms. And then select [I accept this agreement] and click Next to proceed. 

6. The Windows Product Key screen is displayed. Input the 25-digit product key shown on the 

COA (Certificate of Authenticity). Click Next to begin setup. If you enter an incorrect key, a 

message is displayed indicating that. Select [Re-enter valid product key] and then click Next 

to return to the Windows Protect Key screen and input the product key again. 

7. When setup is completed, the Congratulations screen is displayed. Click Finish. 

8. The system asks you to set the Date and Time properties. Check the properties displayed, 

and change them as needed. Click Close to confirm the settings. 

9. The system setting is automatically updated, the system is rebooted, and the Windows 98 SE 

desktop appears. 


Install the MSR Utility by the following procedure. 

1. Start C:\Backup\Msrcfg\ Win\Disk1\SETUP.EXE. 




default. 


Uninstalling the MSR Utility for Windows 



2. Select [Add/Remove Programs] in the control panel. 






Support Information 

Select the My Computer icon on the desktop, click the right mouse button and select Properties 

from the pull down menu. 

Click the Support Information button; the information on the contact is displayed. 

Recovering the OS 

Preparing recovery media 

❏ 

Preparing a start-up disk 

1. Start the command prompt. 

2. Go to the C:\backup\recovery\bootfd directory. 

3. Execute MKDISK.bat. 

4. Insert a floppy disk in the FDD. 

5. Press Enter to start formatting. 

6. A message asking whether you are going to format another floppy disk is displayed. 

Press N. Then the necessary files are copied onto the floppy disk. 

7. A message that the copying is over is displayed. Then exit MS-DOS. 

❏ 

Saving the HD image data 

Save all data under the C:\backup\recovery\data directory onto another medium or drive. 

Example: 

1. Connect the IM-800 in network to a PC that can write data onto CD-Rs. 

2. Save all data under the C:\backup\recovery\data directory of the IM-800 onto the PC. 



3. Write all data saved in step 2 onto a CD-R. 

4. After saving the data, the directory under the C:\backup\recovery directory may be 

deleted. 

❏ 

Backing up each driver 

Each directory under the C:\backup directory is the backup of each driver, which can be 

backed up through individual saving. 

Recovering method 

❏ 

Editing the start-up disk 

Edit CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXE.BAT created in “Preparing a Recovery Medium” to the 

device on which the image data has been saved. 

❏ 

Recovering 

Restrictions 

❏ 

1. Connect the medium or drive onto which the data has been saved in “Preparing a 

Recovery Medium” to the IM-800. 

2. Start the system by using the start-up floppy disk created in “Preparing a Recovery 

Medium.” 

3. Enter “x: [enter]” (x: Drive with the image file). 

4. The following message appears. Select and enter the partition size of the HDD. 

Please select the system partition size. 

1: 10GB (Default size) 

F: Full size of HD. 

Please push a key of 1 or F._ 

5. Execute Start.bat. 

6. Following the title “EasyRestore,” the EPSON Logo Startup screen is displayed. Select 

Continue. 

7. After the OS is recovered, set up the OS. 

8. Return the printer driver for OPOS and Windows saved in “Preparing a Recovery 

Medium.” 

The size of the image data to be saved amounts to 500–600 MB. Saving this much data 

requires a large-capacity device, such as a CD-R, MO, or server. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Because of restrictions by EasyRestore, the HD image data file (HDIMG003.PQI) cannot be 

divided. 

Because EasyRestore runs only on MS-DOS, it is a requirement of “Saving of HD Image 

Data” that MS-DOS can recognize the saving destination device. 

When startup is initiated from the built-in hard disk of the IM-800, recovery is impossible. 


Installation for Windows XP Professional Locally Procured Edition 


If you install Windows XP Professional locally procured edition, follow the steps below. 

Windows XP Professional Installation 

Insert the Windows XP startup disk and CD-ROM; then turn on the IM-800 to 

perform the setup. Enter the product key of the COA package. You can set up 

the Network automatically or set it up later. 

Serial port Driver Installation 

Install the software from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

When using the DM-M820 with Touch Panel, follow the steps below. 




The double click setting 

Set up this setting every time a new user starts using Windows XP. 


When using the DM-M820 with MSR, install the MSR utilities from the 

CD-ROM for the IM-800. See page 4-50 for the procedure. 




Setup procedure 

Windows XP is set up by using the following procedure: 


2. Insert the CD-ROM of Windows XP in the CD-ROM drive and boot up the system. 

3. The [Welcome to Setup] screen is displayed. Press the Enter key. 



4. The [END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT] screen is displayed. Read it through and confirm 

contents. If you agree with them, press the F8 key. 

5. Select the partition to set up Windows, and press the Enter key. When an unformatted 

partition is selected, a confirmation screen is displayed. Execute the format according to the 

instructions on the screen. After that, copying of the file starts. 

6. Reboot the system again according to the instructions on the screen. 

7. The [Regional and Language Options] dialog box is displayed. Confirm the setting contents 

and click Next. 

8. The [Personalize Your Software] dialog box is displayed. Input your name and your 

organization, and then click Next. 

9. The [Your Product key] dialog box is displayed. Input the 25-digit product key shown on the 

COA (Certificate of Authenticity) and click Next. 

10. The [Computer Name and Administrator Password] dialog box is displayed. Input the 

necessary information and click Next. 

11. The [Date and Time Settings] dialog box is displayed. Confirm the setting and click Next. 

12. The [Networking Settings] dialog box is displayed. Select the Typical settings or the Custom 

settings, and click Next. 

13. The [Workgroup or Computer Domain] dialog box is displayed. Select the correct item for 

the environment and click Next. 

14. The system reboots automatically. 

15. The [Welcome to Microsoft Windows] dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

16. Set for Internet access according to the instruction on the screen. 

17. Proceed with the activate Windows according to the instruction on the screen. 

18. Input the user name according to the instruction on the screen. 

19. The [Thank you!] dialog box is displayed. Click Finish; Windows XP will start. 

CAUTION: 

Setup is executed with the VGA display. 

Installing the Serial Port Driver 

Note 

COM1/COM2 can be used without installing the driver. If you use COM3/COM4, you need to install the 

driver. 

If the standby mode of the Operating System is selected, the current mode automatically changes to the 

standby mode even if the data is being output to COM ports. 

1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 in the CD-ROM drive. 


2. Select [Start Menu] and open the control panel. 

3. Select [Printers and Other Hardware] in the control panel. 

4. Select [System] in the [See Also]. 

5. The System dialog is displayed. Select the [Hardware] tab. 

6. Click Device Manager. 

7. Select [Other Devices] - [PCI Serial Port] in the list, and click Properties. 

8. The Properties dialog box is displayed. Click Reinstall Driver. 

9. The [Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Select the "Install 

from a list or specific location" checkbox and click Next. 

10. The [Hardware Installation] dialog box is displayed. Click Continue Anyway. 

11. The [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

12. Next the Serial Port 1 is automatically recognized and the [Welcome to the Found New 

Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Select the "Install the software automatically" 

check box and click Next. 


14. The [Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

15. Next the Serial Port 2 is automatically recognized and the [Welcome to the Found New 

Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Select the "Install the software automatically" 

check box and click Next. 


17. The [Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

Uninstalling the serial port driver 

Uninstalling cannot be done. 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver, MSR Utility and the Other Devices 

See the Installation of Other Drivers section on page 4-45. 



Installation for Windows 2000 Professional Locally Procured Edition 


If you install Windows 2000 Professional locally procured edition, follow the steps below. 

Windows 2000 Professional Installation 

Insert the Windows 2000 startup disk and CD-ROM; then turn on the IM-800 

to perform the setup. Enter the product key of the COA package. You can set 

up the Network automatically or set it up later. 

Chipset Driver Installation 

Install the Chipset Driver from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

Network Driver Installation 

VIDEO Driver Installation 

Sound Driver Installation 







The double click setting 

Set up this setting every time a new user starts using Windows 2000. 



CD-ROM for the IM-800. See page 4-50 for the procedure. 








2. Insert the CD-ROM of Windows 2000 in the CD-ROM drive and boot up the system. 

3. The Setup Wizard starts, and the Welcome dialog box is displayed. Select [Install a new copy 

of Windows 2000], and then click Next. 

4. The License Agreement is displayed. Read it through and confirm your agreement to the 

terms. And then select [I accept the agreement] and click Next. 

5. The Your Product Key screen is displayed. Input the 25-digit product key shown on the 

COA (Certificate of Authenticity). Click Next to begin setup. 

6. Input the necessary information and continue the installation according to the instruction on 

the screen. 

7. When copy of the file is completed, reboot the system again according to the instruction on 

the screen. 

8. After rebooting the system, continue the installation according to the instruction on the 

screen. 

9. Reboot the system again according to the instruction on the screen. 

10. After the system setting is automatically updated, input the necessary information and 

continue the installation according to the instruction of the screen. 

11. The installation is completed, then click Finish according to the instruction on the screen. 

12. After the system is rebooted, the Network Identification wizard is started. Click Next. 

13. Set the Password according to the instruction on the screen. 

14. The installation is completed, and the desktop screen of Windows 2000 is displayed. 

CAUTION: 


Note 

By default, it is impossible to recover from the standby mode with touch panel, keyboard and PS/2 mouse. 

Follow the steps below to set the power management. 

1. Open Start-Settings-Control Panel. 

2. Double-click System in the Control Panel. 



3. The System Properties dialog box appears. Click the Hardware tab. 

4. Click the Device Manager button. 

5. The Device Manager dialog box appears. Select the keyboard as shown in the illustration 

below and click the Properties button in the tool bar. Or right click to show the short-cut 

menu; then select Properties. 


6. The keyboard dialog box appears. Click the Power Management tab. Check the Allow this 

device to bring the computer out of standby box and click OK. 

Installing the Intel Chipset Diver 

This is installed by the exclusive installation program. 

1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 in the CD-ROM drive. Start 

Win2K\Chipset\SETUP.EXE. 

2. The Setup Wizard starts and the Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next. 

3. The License Agreement screen is displayed. Click Yes. 

4. The Readme.txt dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

5. Reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is 

selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 

Uninstalling the Intel chipset driver 


Installing the Network Driver 



Win2K\Network\100PDISK.EXE. 


2. The dialog box to confirm copying the file is displayed. Click Yes. 


3. The Setup Wizard starts, the License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Select [I accept the 

terms in the license agreement] and click Next. 

4. The dialog box which specifies the place of the copy of the file is displayed. Input the place 

and click Next. The default setting is C:\Intel_32. 

5. When copying of the file is completed, the Release note is displayed. 


7. Select [System] in the control panel. 

8. The System dialog box is displayed. Select the [Hardware] tab. 


10. Select [Other Device] - [Ethernet Controller] in the list, and click Properties. 

11. The Properties dialog is displayed. Click Reinstall Driver. 

12. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

13. The dialog box that specifies the search method of the driver is displayed. Confirm that 

[Search for a suitable driver for my device] is selected and click Next. 

14. The dialog box that specifies the place of the search of the driver file is displayed. Check 

[Specify a location] and click Next. 

15. The dialog box for the location the driver file is displayed. Input the directory specified by 

step 4, and click OK. The default setting is C:\INTEL_32. 

16. The confirmation dialog box of the device is displayed. Confirm that the [Intel(R) PRO/ 

100VE Network Connection] is selected, and click Next. 

17. Installing of the driver is completed, the dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

18. The Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection Properties dialog box is displayed. Set up 

necessary items and click Close. 

Uninstalling the network driver 



3. Add/Remove Hardware Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed. Click 

Next. 

4. The Choose a Hardware Task dialog box is displayed. Select Uninstall/Unplug a device, 


5. The Choose a Removal Task dialog box is displayed. Select [Uninstall a device], and click 

Next. 

6. Select Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection in the list and Click Next. 


7. The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed. Select that the [Yes, I want to 

uninstall this device], and click Next. 

8. Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

Installing the Display Driver 



Win2K\Video\Win2K-XPE66.EXE. 

2. The Release note is displayed. Click Next. 


4. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 

5. Installing is completed and the reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to 

restart my computer now] is selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 

Uninstalling the display driver 


Installing the Sound Driver 



Win2K\Sound\SETUP.EXE. 


3. The reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is 

selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 

Uninstalling the sound driver 



3. Add/Remove Hardware Wizard starts and the Welcome dialog box is displayed. Click 

Next. 

4. The Choose a Hardware Task dialog box is displayed. Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device], 


5. The Choose a Removal Task dialog box is displayed. Select [Uninstall a device], and click 

Next. 

6. Select [SoundMAX Integrated Digital Audio] in the list and Click Next. 

7. The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed. Select [Yes, I want to uninstall 

this device] and click Next. 



8. Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 


Note 


driver. 






4. The System dialog is displayed. Select the [Hardware] tab. 


6. Select [Other Device] - [PCI Serial Port] in the list, and click Properties. 


8. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

9. The dialog box which specifies the search method of the driver is displayed. Confirm that 

[Search for a suitable driver for my device] is selected and click Next. 

10. The dialog box which specifies the place of the search of the driver file is displayed. Check 

[Specify a location] and click Next. 

11. The dialog box for the location of the driver file is displayed. Input D:\Win2K\Serial to the 

directory and click OK. 

12. The confirmation dialog box of the device is displayed. Confirm that the [PCI Serial Port] is 

selected and click Next. 

13. When installation of the driver is completed, a dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

14. The ITE8872 Properties dialog box is displayed. Set up necessary items and click Close. 






Installation for Windows NT Locally procured edition 

Note 

If you use Windows NT, you need to install Service Pack 6a. 


If you install Windows NT Local procured edition, follow the steps below. 

Operating System Installation 

Inseert the CD-ROM for Windows NT and turn on the IM-800 to perform the 

setup. Enter the product key of the COA package. You can set up the Network 

automatically or set it up later. 



Service Pack 6a Installation 

Obtain Service Pack 6a and install it. 

Set the HDD to the DMA mode by using Service pack 6a. 











CD-ROM for the IM-800. See page 4-50. 







Windows NT is set up by using the following procedure: 

1. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the PC. 

2. Insert the CD-ROM of Windows NT in the CD-ROM drive and boot up the system. 

3. The Welcome to Setup screen dialog box is displayed. Press the Enter key. 

4. According to the instructions on the screen, input the necessary items and continue 

installing. 

5. The Windows NT Licensing Agreement dialog box is displayed. Press the PageDown key 

and confirm contents to the last page. Press the F8(I agree) key. 

6. According to the instructions on the screen, input the necessary items and continue 

installing. 

7. When copying of the file is completed, according to the instruction on the screen, take the 

Windows NT CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, and then boot the system from the HDD. 

8. The Windows NT Setup Wizard starts. According to the instruction on the screen, insert the 

CD-ROM of Windows NT to the CD-ROM drive again and click OK. 

9. According to the instruction of the screen, input the necessary items and continue installing. 

10. The Registration dialog box is displayed. Input the 10-digit CD key shown on the COA 

(Certificate of Authenticity). Select Next to begin setup. 

11. According to the instruction of the screen, input the necessary items and continue installing. 

12. According to the instruction of the screen, set up the date /time and the display. 

13. When installing is completed, according to the instruction of the screen, click Restart 

Computer and the system is rebooted. The desktop screen of Windows NT is displayed. 

CAUTION: 





Winnt\Network\100PDISK.EXE. 

2. The dialog box to confirm copy the file is displayed. Click Yes. 

3. The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Select [I accept 

the terms in the license agreement] and click Next. 


4. The dialog box which specifies the place of the copy of the file is displayed. Input the place 

and click Next. The default setting is C:\Intel_32. 


6. Open the Control Panel, and select Network. A dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 

7. The Network Setup Wizard starts. Check the [Wired to the Network] check box, and click 

Next. 

8. Click Select from list. 



9. Click Have Disk. 

10. The Insert Disk dialog box is displayed. Input the directory specified by step 4, and click OK. 

The default setting is C:\INTEL_32. 

11. The Select OEM option dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Intel(R) PRO Adapter] is 

selected, and click OK. 

12. The Intel(R) PRO Adapter is added to the network adapter. Click Next. 

13. Select the network protocol. Set it to your system. Then click Next. 


14. Select the network service. Set it to your system. Then click Next. 

15. The following dialog box is displayed. When Next is clicked, installation starts. 

16. The dialog box that specifies the directory of the copy origin is displayed. Insert the 

CD-ROM of Windows NT in the CD-ROM drive and input D:\ (if the CD-ROM drive is the 

D drive) and click OK. 

17. In accordance with the environment used, continue the installation according to the 

instruction on the screen. 

18. When installing is completed, according to the instruction of the screen, reboot the system. 

CAUTION: 

If the network is installed after the setup, an error is caused in the logon procedure. After 

installing the network driver, install the Service Pack 6a. 





Installing Service Pack 6a 


1. Insert the Service Pack 6a CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. Execute the 

“Nt4sp6\Sp6i386.exe” on the Service Pack 6a CD-ROM. 

2. The Setup Wizard starts, the License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Select [Accept the 

license agreement] and click Install. 

3. Installing is completed; then the dialog box is displayed. Click Restart. 

Ultra DMA Setting for the HDD 

You can set the HDD to the DMA mode by following the steps below. 

1. Set the Service Pack 6a CD-ROM to the CD-ROM drive. Execute the 

“Nt4sp6\Support\Utils\I386\Dmacheck.exe” in the Service Pack 6a CD-ROM. 

2. ATAPI DMA Support dialog box appears. Set the DMA Detection Status of the Current 

DMA Usage Channel 0 to enabled and click OK. 

3. A warning dialog box appears. Click Yes. 


4. A finished dialog box appears. Click OK. 

5. The system reboots. 


Before installing the display driver, be sure to install Service Pack 6a. 


1. Set the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 to the CD-ROM drive. Start 

Winnt\Video\Winnt4E66.EXE. 

2. The Release note is displayed. Click Next. 

3. The Setup Wizard starts. The Welcome dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 


5. Installing is completed and the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed. 

Confirm that the [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is selected, and click Finish to 

reboot the system. 






Winnt\Sound\SETUP.EXE. 


3. The About SoundMAX Integrated Digital Audio dialog box is displayed. Click OK. 

4. The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to restart my 

computer now] is selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 




3. Select [SoundMAX NT]. 




5. The Confirm File Deletion dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 

6. Uninstalling is completed and the dialog box is displayed. Click OK. 

7. The reboot dialog box is displayed. Click OK. 

8. Reboot the system. 



Note 


driver. 


Winnt\Serial\SETUP.EXE. 

2. The Setup Wizard starts and the Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Click 

Yes. 

3. The Information dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

4. The Setup Complete dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

5. The Reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] 

is selected, and click Finish. 




3. Select [ITE887X Uninstall]. 


5. The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed. Click OK. 

6. The Reboot dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 


See the MSR Utility Installation on page 4-50 and the Installation of Other Drivers section on 

page 4-45. 


Installation for Windows 98 Locally Procured Edition 


If you install Windows 98 Locally procured edition, follow the steps below 


Inseert the MS-DOS startup disk and CD-ROM for Windows 98 and turn on 

the IM-800 to perform the setup. Enter the product key of the COA package. 

You can set up the Network automatically or set it up later. 

Chipset Driver Installation 

Install using the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 


Set the HDD to the DMA mode with OS. 









page 4-45for the procedure. 


When using the DM-M820 with MSR, install the MSR utilities from the Driver 

CD-ROM for the IM-800. 






Setup Procedure 


1. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the PC. 

2. Insert the Startup disk of the MS-DOS to the FDD. Turn on the power supply to the system. 

3. Insert the CD-ROM of Windows 98 in the CD-ROM drive and start the SETUP.EXE. The 

Setup Wizard starts. 

4. The License Agreement is displayed. Read it through and confirm your agreement to the 

terms. And then select [I accept the agreement] and select Next to proceed. 

5. The Windows Product Key screen is displayed. Input the 25-digit product key shown on the 

COA (Certificate of Authenticity). Select Next to begin setup. If you enter an incorrect key, a 

message is displayed indicating that. Select Re-enter valid product key and then select Next 

to return to the Windows Protect Key screen ad input the product key again. 

6. According to the instruction on the screen, input the necessary items and continue installing. 

7. When copying of the file is completed, take the Setup disk of the MS-DOS out of the FDD, 

and then according to the instruction on the screen, reboot the system. 

8. After rebooting the system, according to the instruction of the screen, set up the Network 

and the Date/Time. 

9. According to the instruction on the screen, reboot the system. 

10. Drivers for the system are installed by Plug and Play. According to the instruction on the 

screen, input the necessary items and continue installing. 

11. When installing is completed, and according to the instruction on the screen, click Finish. 

The desktop screen is displayed. 

CAUTION: 


Installing the Chipset Driver for Intel 


1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 in the CD-ROM drive and start 

\Win98\Cipset\SETUP.EXE. 


3. The License Agreement screen is displayed. Click Yes. 



5. The Reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that the [Yes, I want to restart my computer 

now] is selected, and click Finish. 

6. After the system is restarted, the Chipset drivers are installed. 

7. After installation, according to the instruction on the screen, reboot the system. 

Uninstalling the chipset driver for Intel 



You can set the HDD to the DMA mode by following the steps below. 



3. The system Properties dialog box appears. Click the [Device Manager] tab. 

4. Select “GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47” from [Disk drives] and click Properties. 

5. The GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47 Properties dialog box appears. Click the [Settings] tab. 



6. Check [DMA] in the [Option] group box. 

7. The following dialog box appears. Click OK. 

8. Click OK to close the GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE47 Properties dialog box. 

9. Click Close to close the System Properties dialog box. 

10. The following dialog box appears. Click Yes to restart the system. 




Win98\Network\100PDISK.EXE. 

2. The dialog box to confirm copy the file is displayed. Click Yes. 

3. The Setup Wizard starts and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Select [I accept 



4. The dialog box that specifies the location of the file is displayed. Input the place and click 

Next. The default setting is C:\Intel_32. 

5. When copy of the file is completed, the Release note is displayed. 

6. Select [Start Menu] - [Settings] and open the Control Panel. 


8. The System dialog box is displayed. Click [Device Manager]. 

9. Select [Other Device] - [PCI Ethernet Controller] in the list, and click Properties. 


11. The Update Device Driver Wizard dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

12. The dialog box which specifies the search method of the driver is displayed. Confirm that 

[Search for a better driver than the one your device is using now] and click Next. 

13. The dialog box which specifies the place of the search of the driver file is displayed. Check 

[Specify a location] and click Next. Input the directory specified by step4, and Click Next. 

14. The confirmation dialog box of the device is displayed. Confirm that the [The updated 

driver Intel PRO/100VE Network Connection] is selected, and Click Next. 

15. The confirmation dialog box of the installation of the driver is displayed. Click Next. 

16. Another installation message is displayed. Click OK. 

17. The dialog box that specifies the location of the driver file is displayed. Input the directory 

specified by step 4 to [Copy files from], and Click OK. 

18. Installing of the driver is completed; then the dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

19. The dialog box requiring rebooting the system is displayed. Click Yes to reboot the system. 




3. Select [Intel PRO Ethernet Adapter and Software]. 



6. The dialog box to reboot the system is displayed. Click Yes to reboot the system. 





1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 in the CD-ROM drive and start 

\Win98\Video\Win9Xe66.EXE. 




5. Installing is completed and the Reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to 

restart my computer now] is selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 






Win98\Sound\SETUP.EXE. 


3. The reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that the [Yes, I want to restart my computer 

now] is selected, and click Finish to reboot the system. 

4. The Sound Driver is installed after the system is rebooted. 

5. Another message box is displayed. Click OK. 

6. The dialog box that specifies the lication of the driver file is displayed. Input 

D:\Win98\Sound\Smax\WDM\SE to [Copy files from] (If the CD-ROM drive is the D 

drive). Click OK and installing is completed. 




3. Select [SoundMAX]. 


5. The confirmation dialog box of the uninstalling is displayed. Select [Remove] and click Next. 


6. The reboot dialog box is displayed. Confirm that [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is 

selected, and click Finish. 


Note 


driver. 



1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for IM-800 in the CD-ROM Drive. Execute \Win98\ 

serial\setup.exe. 




3. Select [ITE887X]. 



6. The reboot dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 





Installation for MS-DOS Locally Procured Version 


If you install MS-DOS Locally procured version, follow the steps below. 

Operating System Installation 

Insert the MS-DOS startup disk and turn on the IM-800 to perform the Setup. 

As for the installation procedure, refer to the MS-DOS manual. 

CD-ROM Driver Installation 

As for installing MS-DOS only, the CD-ROM drive for the IM-800 is not 

recognized. Therefore, by using other PC to read the CD-ROM, install the 

CD-ROM driver in the IM-800 after copying the CD-ROM driver on the 

floppy disk from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 


The Network Driver is provided in the form compressed in the Driver 

CD-ROM for the IM-800, but MS-DOS cannot extract the compressed file. 

Therefore, by using other PC to read the CD-ROM, install the Network driver 

toin the IM-800 after extracting the Network driver in the Driver CD-ROM for 

the IM-800. 


Install the file to the IM-800 from the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

When using the DM-M820 with Touch Panel, follow the steps as below. 



page 4-49. 


When using the DM-M820 with MSR, install the MSR Utilities from the Driver 

CD-ROM for the IM-800. See page 4-51. 


Installing the CD-ROM Driver 

After installing the MS-DOS locally procured edition only, the CD-ROM drive of the IM-800 is 

not recognized. Therefore, use other PC to read the CD-ROM, and install the CD-ROM driver to 

the IM-800 after copying the CD-ROM driver to a floppy disk from the Driver CD-ROM for the 

IM-800. 

Note 

When using the CD-ROM driver, MSCDEX.EXE of MS-DOS is needed. 

Install the CD-ROM driver by the following procedure. 

1. Start the other PC to read the CD-ROM, and insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 to the 

CD-ROM drive. Insert a formatted floppy disk in the FDD. 

2. Copy \Dos62\CD-ROM\CDATAPI.SYS in the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 to the floppy 

disk. 

3. Turn on the IM-800 to start MS-DOS. 

4. Insert the floppy disk copied by step 2 in the FDD of the IM-800. 

5. Copy the CDATAPI.SYS on the floppy disk to the optional directory in the hard disk. For 

example, copy it on C:\DOS\directory. 

6. Add the following description to the CONFIG.SYS of MS-DOS with a text editor, and save it. 

The following example is for copying to the C:\DOS\directory. In case of copying to other 

directory, describe the directory name with its full path. 

DEVICE=C:\DOS\CDATAPI.SYS /D:CDROM 

7. Add the following description to the AUTOEXEC.BAT of the MS-DOS with a text editor, 

and save it. The following example has MSCDEX.EXE in the C:\DOS\directory. If you have 

it in another directory, describe the directory with its full path. In case of the /L option, 

specify a drive name. The following is an example specifying the D drive. In case of 

specifying the other drive name, describe the optional drive name. 

C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:CDROM /L:D 

8. Restart MS-DOS. 


The Network Driver is provided in the form compressed in the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

MS-DOS cannot extract the compressed file. Therefore, by using another PC to read the 

CD-ROM, install the Network driver to the IM-800 after extracting the Network driver in the 

Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800. 

Note 

Windows 98, NT or 2000 is necessary for extracting the compressed file. 

Extracting the network driver 

Extract the compressed file of the Network Driver by the following procedure. 

1. Start the other PC to read the CD-ROM, and start either Windows 98, NT, or 2000. 




3. Start \Dos62\Network\100PDISK.EXE. 

4. The dialog box to confirm copying the file is displayed. Click Yes. 

5. The Setup Wizard starts, and the License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Select [I accept 


6. The dialog box that specifies the place of the copy of the file is displayed. Input the place and 

click Next. The default setting is C:\Intel_32. 


Installing the network driver 

Note 

Different environments require different ways of setting the Network Driver. For the details of the 

installation procedure, see the setting manual (HTML style) in the C:\Intel_32\Info\ directory in the file 

extracted by the preceding procedure. 

The following example describes the procedure to install the Netware DOS ODI Client Driver. 

1. Copy all files in the C:\Intel_32\DOS\ directory in the file extracted by the preceding 

procedure on the floppy disk. 

2. Turn on the IM-800 to start MS-DOS. 

3. Insert the floppy disk copied by step 1 in the FDD of the IM-800. 

4. Copy all files in the floppy disk to the optional directory in the hard disk. For example, copy 

it to the C:\NWCLIENT\ directory. 

5. Add the following description to the CONFIG.SYS of the MS-DOS with a text editor, and 

save it. 

LASTDRIVE=Z 

6. Edit the following description in C:\NWCLIENT\NET.CFG with a text editor, and save it. 

The following is the example of the setting for the NET.CFG. 

LINK DRIVER E100BODI 

FRAME ETHERNET_802.2 

SPEED=100 

PROTOCOL IPX EO Ethernet_802.2 

NETWARE DOS REQUESTER 

FIRST NETWORK DRIVE = F 

PB BUFFERS = 10 


7. Add the following description to the AUTOEXEC.BAT of MS-DOS with a text editor, and 

save it. The following is the example of the having the driver file in the C:\NWCLIENT\ 

directory. In case of having it in the other directory, describe as "CD [the directory name]". 

CD NWCLIENT 

LSL 

E100BODI 

IPXODI 

NETX 

8. Turn off the IM-800 and connect it to the network. 

9. Turn on the IM-800 and restart MS-DOS. 


Note 

COM1/COM2 can be used without installing this driver. In case of using COM3/COM4, it is necessary 

to install this driver. 

For installing this driver, it is necessary for the CD-ROM drive to work normally. 

Install the serial port driver by the following procedure. 

1. Turn on the IM-800 and start MS-DOS. 


3. Copy \Dos62\Serial\ITE.COM to the optional directory in the hard disk. For example, 

copy it to the C:\DOS\ directory. 

4. Input the following form the command prompt of the MS-DOS and start it. 

C:\ITE.COM [COM3=xxxx] [COM4=yyyy] 

The parameter means as follows. 

COM3=xxxx :This specifies the Port address of COM3. 

COM4=yyyy :This specifies the Port address of COM4. 

The parameter can be omitted. In this case, the following default value is set. 

COM3 

:3E8h/IRQ11 

COM4 

:2E8h/IRQ10 

5. Input the following from the command prompt of the MS-DOS to finish. 

C:\ITE.COM -r 

6. Input the following from the command prompt of the MS-DOS to display the Usage. 

C:\ITE.COM /? 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver, MSR utility and the Other Devices 




Installation of Other Drivers 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver for Windows 

Note 

Be sure to set the touch panel driver to COM1 or COM2. COM3/COM4 cannot be used. 


1. Insert the touch panel driver CD-ROM for DM-M820 in the CD-ROM drive. 

European: 

Start \Win\european\SETUP.EXE. 

Chinese T/C,korean : Start \Win\asian\SETUP.EXE. 

2. Start the touch panel driver set up program. The Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next. 

3. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed. Confirm the contents, and if you agree, click 

Accept. 

4. The Select folder dialog box is displayed. Specify the installation destination program folder, 

click Next. Gunze\U-TP is specified as the default. 

5. The Select Destination Directory dialog box is displayed. Specify the directory where the 

program is to be installed, click Next. C:\Program Files\Gunze\U-UP is specified as the 

default. 

6. The Install system tray icons dialog box is displayed. Specify the registration of the utility 

icon on the Task tray or not. Click Next. 


7. The Number of devices dialog box is displayed. Confirm the number 1 is specified. Click 

Next. 

8. The Desktop Segment dialog box is displayed. Specify the Device Segment (the range to 

allocate the touch panel), enter the optional panel name. Click Next. Whole Desktop is 

usually the best choice. 



9. The Select Controller dialog box is displayed. Select the [Gunze,AHL,Serial]. Click Next. 

10. The Port dialog box is displayed. Specify the Serial Port. Check the Auto Detect box or enter 

the number of the COM port that you use. Click Next. Advanced is usually not needed. 

CAUTION: 

Be sure not to set the port to COM3/COM4. 


11. The Ready to Install dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

12. Installation ends and the Install Successful dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

13. After the installation, the dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. 

14. After rebooting the system, the calibration of the touch panel is executed automatically. See 

“Touch Panel Calibration.” 

Uninstalling the touch panel driver for Windows 

Uninstall the touch panel driver by the following procedure. 



3. Select [Universal Pointer Device Driver]. 




5. The Uninstall Universal Pointer Device Driver dialog box is displayed. Click Next. 

6. The Uninstall Completed dialog box is displayed. Click Finish. 

7. The dialog box to require rebooting the system is displayed. Click Yes and reboot the 

system. 

Installing the Touch Panel Driver for MS-DOS 

Note 

Be sure to set the touch panel driver to COM1 or COM2. COM3/COM4 cannot be used. 


1. Insert the touch panel driver CD-ROM for the DM-M820 to the CD-ROM drive. Start 

\Dos\INSTALL.EXE. 

2. The touch screen screen is displayed. Select AHL/AR5000 and Digitouch Controllers by 

using the cursor keys, and press Enter. 

3. The Installation Options screen is displayed. Normally, leave the default setting as it is. To 

change the setting, select the item to be selected by using the cursor keys, and press Enter. 

The setting contents are changed. Select Start Installation, and press Enter to start copying 

the file to C:\TOUCH directory. 

4. After copying is complete, press any key. The hardware setting is displayed. 

5. Press any key. Readme is displayed. 

6. Press Esc to terminate installation. 

7. Enter the following from the prompt to install the driver: 

For example: Set to COM2 

TTDOS 2 /I:3 Enter 

TBMOUSE 1 Enter 

TT-DOS Command Line 

TTDOS [Port] [/A:address] [/C:bbbb,p,s][/I] 

Port: 

Specifies the serial port [Default:1] 

/A:Address: Port address [Default: 3F8] 

/C:bbbb,p,d,s 

Communications parameters 

bbbb: Baudrate [Default: 9600] 

p: Parity (N,O,E) [Default: N] 

d: Data bit (7,8) [Default: 8] 

s: Stop bit (1,2) [Default: 1] 

/I:Irq. Interrupt request number (0 to 15) 


TBMOUSE Command Line 

TBMOUSE mode 

Mode:1 

If the screen is touched, the mouse cursor moves to the place that was touched and the left 

mouse button is pressed. After that, the finger can be slid across the screen with the left 

button held down. The mouse button is released if the finger is lifted from the screen. 

Mode:2 

If the screen is touched, the mouse cursor moves to the place that was touched, but the left 

mouse button is not pressed. Then you can slide your finger across the screen without the 

left button being pressed. If the finger's motion is stopped for approximately 0.5 seconds, the 

left mouse button is pressed. At this time, a short warning tone sounds once. Once the left 

button is pressed, the finger can be slid across the screen with the button pressed. The mouse 

button is released when the finger is lifted from the screen. 

Mode:3 

Mode 3 resembles Mode 2, but a double click is enabled. Once the finger's motion is stopped, 

then, while the mouse button is pressed, the finger is quickly separated from the screen and 

then immediately brought in contact with the screen again. At this time, a warning tone 

sounds once, and the button is immediately pressed again in the same position it was in the 

first time it was pressed. 

Mode:4 

After the finger is quickly lifted from the screen, touching the screen again causes the mouse 

button to be pressed. 

To display the parameter details, enter the following: 

TTDOS /? Enter 

TBMOUSE /? Enter 



1. Insert the Driver CD-ROM for the IM-800 in the CD-ROM drive. Start Common\Msrcfg\ 

Win\Disk1\SETUP.EXE. 




default. 




Uninstalling the MSR utility for Windows 








Installing the MSR Utility for MS-DOS 



Common\Msrcfg\Dos\INSTALL.BAT. 

2. The file is copied on the C:\Msrcfg\ directory. 

Setting of Windows and Drivers 

Touch Panel Driver for Windows 

Note 

When using the touch panel driver, be sure not to install the mouseware. If you install the mouseware, 

there is a possibility that you cannot use the touch panel driver correctly. 

Calibrating the touch panel 

The touch panel calibration refers to the setting for matching the physical position taken when 

the operator presses the touch panel with the software position recognized by the computer. 

The touch panel calibration is executed when the touch point of the touch panel is displayed. 

The touch panel calibration on Windows 2000 is executed by using the following procedure: 

1. Start Windows. 


2. Select Programs - Gunze - U-TP - Calibrate in that order from the Start menu. 

3. The calibration screen is displayed and an X mark is displayed in the top left corner of 

the screen. 

4. Press the X mark’s intersection point on the screen. The X mark will then move to the top 

right of the screen. 

5. Then press the X mark’s intersection point again. With the default setting, the X mark is 

displayed in 4 places: top left, bottom left, top right, bottom right. The calibration point 

is set from 2 to 25. As for the setting method, refer to “Touch Panel Driver setting.” 

6. The calibration is completed when all the intersection points have been pressed. 

Double click tolerance 

It is sometimes difficult to perform a double-click with a touch screen because your finger moves 

slightly between touches. However, if you increase the double-click tolerance, your double-click 

can be recognized correctly. 



Note 

In Windows NT/2000/XP, only an administrator can change the value. In Windows 2000 /XP, the 

tolerance needs to be made larger for each registered user account with this tool. Regular users can click 

[Default]. 


2. Pointer Device Properties is displayed. Click the Windows tab. 

3. Slide [Time], [Height], and [Width] of the Double Click Settings group box to appropriate 

values and click [Apply]. Click [Default] to choose the default value. 

4. Double-click the Double Click button of the Mouse Click Test group box to check if the 

double-click is recognized correctly. If it is recognized correctly, the icon will be changed. 

5. Click OK. 

Touch panel settings tool 

Note 

In Windows NT/2000/XP, when executing the Touch Panel Settings Tool, only an administrator can 

change the settings. The values set by the administrator are available for all users. If the user who is not an 

administrator executes the Touch Panel Settings Tool, the following dialog box appears. If [OK] is clicked, 

the Touch Panel Settings Tool will be displayed and the settings can be shown but cannot be changed. 


The touch panel settings tool can set detailed items related to touch panel operation. It consists 

of the following: 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Device 

Addition and the deletion of the device and the setting of the communication method. 

Hardware 

Setting the connect environment of the touch panel driver. 

Settings 

Setting the recognition condition at the touching time. 

Advanced 

Management of the touching position data and the setting of the beep. 

Events 

Setting of the touching operation and the relation of the mouse button operation. 

General 

Display of the confirmation massages and icons. 

Button Modes 

Setting of the touching operation (The button mode). 

Windows 

Setting of the double-click conditions. 

Calibration 

Setting of the calibration conditions. 

Status 

Display of the present communication status. 

About 

Display of the version information. 



Touch Panel Driver setting property 

Start the display of the touch panel driver setting property by the following procedure. 



3. The Pointer Device Properties screen is displayed. 

If there is a Device Manager icon in the task tray, the Touch Panel Driver Setting Properties can 

be displayed by the following procedure. 



2. Click the icon on the task tray and select Settings from the Pull up menu. 

Devices 

3. The Pointer Device Properties screen is displayed. 

The following screen is displayed if the Devices tab is clicked. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Add] 

The device name can be assigned to the touch panel system connected to the IM-800. There is 

no need to set it generally. 

[Remove] 

Delete the assigned touch panel system. 

[Modify] 

There are settings to allocate the touch panel to a specific area on the screen (such as the left 

half), but there is no need to use these settings because the whole screen is allocated to the 

touch panel. 



Hardware 

The following screen is displayed if the Hardware tab is clicked. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Hardware settings for] 

Select the touch panel device name. Generally “Device 1" is selected. 

[Port] 

This sets the communication port. There is usually no need to change it. 

[Auto Detect] 

This detects the Port, the Address and the IRQ for the connected touch panel. There is 

usually no need to change it. 

[Address] 

This displays the address used. This item cannot be set here. 

[Irq] 

This displays the IRQ used. This item cannot be set here. 

[Baud rate] 

This displays the Baud rate used. This item cannot be set here. 

[Parity] 

This displays the parity used. This item cannot be set here. 

[Data Bits] 

This displays the data bit used. This item cannot be set here. 

[Stop Bits] 

This displays the stop bit used. This item cannot be set here. 

[FIFO] 

Sets the buffer mode. Data sent from the touch panel to the IM-800 is stored in the buffer and 

processed but when the performance of the computer is low, an overrun error in which data 


is overwritten by new data before it is processed sometimes occurs. When setting the FIFO, 

the overrun error can be avoided using the inner cache. This item is set to 8 generally, so 

there is no need to change it. 

❏ 

[Check Port] 

This displays the time interval (the second) for checking the COM Port condition for 

connected the touch panel. This item cannot be set here. 

Settings 

The following screen is displayed if the Settings tab is clicked. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[General settings for] 

Select the touch panel device name to set. Generally, “Device 1" is selected. 

[Click time] 

The click time is the timer set in 55 ms units. The default setting is 1. 

If the screen is touched and the finger does not move within the specified time, a click is 

executed. 

[Tap time] 

The Tap time is the timer set in 55 ms units. The default setting is 9. If the button mode is set 

to the “Tap Mode,” when the finger is left in one place for the specified time, it is registered 

as a double click. 

[Lift off time] 

The Lift off time is set in 55 ms units. The default setting is 2. If Use liftoff packet is selected, 

the program will ignore any lifting of the finger shorter than the time specified. 

[Stabilization] 

This ignores the data when the change of the touch position data is smaller than the set 

value. The default setting is 0. For example, if this is set to 20, no change of position is 

registered if the change of the touch position is less than 20. 



❏ 

[Averaging] 

This samples plural values of touch position data and averages them. The default setting is 

0. If it is set higher, the program will ignore minute movements of the finger. 

Note: 

If the Averaging value is too high, the following of the cursor is not good and sometimes the cursor may fly 

to an unexpected location. 

❏ 

[Low pass filter] 

This can filter and ignore the data containing jitters, noise and unusual data. The default 

setting is 0 and the Low pass filter feature is off. 

Note: 

When making the value of the Low pass filter high, the following of the mouse cursor becomes bad. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Use liftoff packet] 

When the User liftoff packet checkbox is clicked, the touch panel recognizes when the finger 

leaves the touch panel immediately regardless of the setting value of the Lift off time. 

[Packets] 

This item is not supported. 

[Defaults] 

This returns each setting to the default. 

Advanced 

The following screen is displayed if the Advanced tab is clicked. 

The management of the touching position data and the setting of the beep sounds. 

❏ 

[Advanced settings for] 

Select the touch panel device name to set. Generally, the “Device 1" is selected. 


❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Sample rate] 

Set the rate to process the touch position data. The default setting is 100 (%). There is usually 

no need to change it. 

[Touchdown filter] 

When some first data of the touch position are unstable these data are ignored and the 

following data is processed. The default setting is 0. 

[Deglitch] 

The value of the touch position data is sometimes interfered with in an environment near 

equipment generating a lot of noise. Deglitch ignores data that varies more than the 

specified amount. The default setting is 0. 

[Sound-pitch] 

Set the frequency of the click sound at the time of the touch. The default setting is 1000 Hz. 

[Sound-duration] 

Set the length of the click sound at the touching. The default setting is 55 ms. 

[Swap X/Y] 

This swaps a movement of the top and the bottom and the right and the left of the mouse 

cursor. There is usually no need to use this. 

[Enabled] 

The touch panel disabled temporarily if this item is checked off. 

[Initialize] 

This initializes the touch panel system at the start-up. There is usually no need to set this. 

[Sound] 

This sets the click sound ON or OFF. 

[Anchor mouse] 

This sets the mouse cursor to return to the fixed position automatically. Check the Anchor 

mouse checkbox and press the Apply button. Then move the mouse cursor to the desired 

position and click on the left button of the mouse to set the position. 

[Macros] 

Don’t set this item. 

[Defaults] 

This returns each setting to the default. 



Events 

The following screen is displayed if the Events tab is clicked. 

Set the layout of the operation at the touching and the mouse button operation as a click, a 

double click and so on. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Events for] 

Select the touch panel device name. Generally, the “Device 1" is selected. 

[Primary] 

Sets the operation when the left mouse button is chosen in the system tray or the mouse icon 

of the event selector. 

[Secondary] 

Sets the operation when the right mouse button is chosen in the system tray or the mouse 

icon of the event selector. 

The button mode can be set is as follows. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Touchdown Left] 

When the panel is touched, the cursor moves to the touched place and a Left button click is 

executed. It is possible to drag in this condition. A double click can be executed by tapping 

the same place twice quickly. (Touchdown Right is the same except that it executes a right 

button click.) 

[Time Double Click Left] 

If the finger on the touch panel does not move for the amount of time specified, a Left button 

double click is executed. (Time Double Click Right is the same except a Right button double 

click is executed.) 

[Time Left] 


executed. After the click, you can drag. The time is set at the Click time in the Settings tab. 


❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Time/Time Left] 


executed. The time is set at the Click time in the Settings tab. After the click, you can drag. A 

double click can be executed by keeping the finger in the same position after the click 

operation. 

[Time/Tap Left] 


executed. The time is set at the Click time in the Settings tab. After the click, you can drag. A 

double click can be executed by lifting the finger then tapping the same spot quickly. 

[Touchdown Immediate Left] 

When touching in the touch panel, the mouse cursor moves to the touched place and the Left 

button click is executed. The click is cancelled when the finger is moved. Therefore, a drag is 

not possible. A double click can be executed by touching the same place twice quickly. 

[Touchdown Double click Left (Right)] 

When touching in the touch panel, the mouse cursor moves to the touched place and the Left 

button double click is executed. Then the click is cancelled. 

[Tap Double click Left] 

When touching in the touch panel, the mouse cursor moves to the touched place but a click 

and a double click are not executed. The Left button double click is executed by lifting the 

finger quickly in the tap time and retouching at once. The tap time is set at the Tap time in 

the Settings tab. 

[Tap Left] 


is not executed. The Left button click is executed by lifting the finger quickly in the tap time 

and retouching at once. A double click can be executed by doing it twice. The tap time is set 

at the Tap time in the Settings tab. 

[Liftoff Double click Left] 


and a double click are not executed. When the finger is lifted, a Left button double click is 

executed and the click is cancelled. 

[Liftoff Left] 


is not executed. When the finger is lifted, the Left button double click is executed and the 

click is cancelled. A double click is executed by touching the touch panel quickly and lifting 

the finger at once. 

[Set Primary] 

When touching the touch panel, the mouse icon on the system tray and the mouse icon of 

the event selector become the left button choice condition. 

[Set Secondary] 

When touching the touch panel, the mouse icon on the system tray and the mouse icon of 

the event selector become the right button choice condition. 



❏ 

[None] 


is not executed. 

General 

The following screen is displayed if the General tab is clicked. 

Set the display of the confirmation messages and the icons, beeps and so on. 

❏ 

[Show icons in system tray] 

This sets whether to display the touch panel driver setting and the icon of the event selector 

at the system tray. 

Touch panel driver setting icon 

Event selector icon 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Check calibration] 

When you click the checkbox, whether or not the calibration data has been saved and the 

calibration date (if the data was saved) are displayed. 

[Calibration beeps] 

This sets beeps during calibration on or off. 

[Clone] 

This saves the present touch panel driver setting to the UPDclone.dat file. 

[Dump settings] 

This saves the present touch panel driver setting to the UPDDset.txt file. 


Button Modes 

The following screen is displayed for the Button Modes tab. 

Set the details of the operation of the button mode. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Edit mode] 

Select the button mode name to edit. It is possible to register new button modes. For the 

operation of each button mode, see the “Events” section. 

[Button (Left, Right)] 

Clicking the Left radio button selects the left click or the left double click operation to be 

edited. In the same way, clicking the Right radio button selects the right click or the right 

double click operation to be edited. 

[Show on menus] 

Clicking the checkbox causes the button mode edited to be registered and displayed as a 

menu on the pull up menu displayed when clicking the touch panel driver setting icon in the 

system tray. 

[Triggers] 

Set the detailed operation of the button mode. The details of each item are as follows. 

• Down 1: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the 1st click. 

• Up 2: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the click 

cancellation. 

• Down 3: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the 2nd click. 

(Down 3 becomes valid when it executed in the click time.) 

• Up 4: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the 2nd click 

cancellation. 



• Down 5: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the 3rd click. 

(Down 5 becomes valid when it executed in the click time.) 

• Up 6: 

This sets the touch operation recognized as the 3rd click 

cancellation. 

The following are the choices for the trigger settings 

• None: 

Does not assign a touch operation. 

• Immediate: 

Executes immediately after a touch operation. 

• Touchdown: 

Executes when the panel is touched. 

• Liftoff: 

Executes when the finger leaves the touch panel. 

• Time: 

Executes when the touching is stationary. 

• Tap: 

Executes when the panel is touched two times quickly. 

Note: 

Don't set Down 5 and Down 6 to “Immediate” because the system gets into a loop and has to be reset. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Add] 

This adds a new button mode. 

[Delete] 

This deletes a button mode. 

[Defaults] 

This returns the button mode to its original settings. 


Windows 

The following screen is displayed if the Windows tab is clicked. 

Set the detailed items about the Double Click. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Time] 

This sets the time interval to recognize as a double click. The default is 900 ms. 

[Height] 

This sets the vertical space between the touch positions that will be recognized as a double 

click. The default is 64 pixels. 

[Width] 

This sets the horizontal space between the touch positions that will be recognized as a 

double click. The default is 64 pixels. 

[Defaults] 

This returns each setting item to its original value. 

[Mouse Click Test] 

This tests the single click and the double click. When the click is done correctly, the face on 

the button changes. 

Note: 

When Windows 2000 is set up and a new user is entered, set the double click latitude to the Default value 

(64) for each user. For the details, see the “The double click setting depends on following the registry 

key” section. 



Calibration 

The following screen is displayed when the Calibration tab is clicked. 

Set the detailed items about the calibration condition. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

[Calibration settings for] 

Select the touch panel device name to set. “Device 1" is usually selected. 

[Calibration modes] 

This names the calibration modes including user settings and loads the one selected. 

[Add] 

This saves a new set calibration mode. 

[Remove] 

This removes a saved calibration mode. 

[Calibration points] 

Sets the number of the calibration points between 2-25. 

[Timeout] 

After the calibration program is executed, if the calibration is not started within the time set 

by the Timeout, it is cancelled. 

[Start in at] 

This sets the space (as a percentage) between the outside of the screen and the calibration 

points. 

[Rotate] 

This is not supported. This item cannot be set. 

[Calibration pattern] 

This displays the pattern of the calibration point. 


❏ 

❏ 

[Transparent background] 

With this checkbox checked, the background in calibration execution becomes transparent 

and only the calibration point “X” is displayed. 

[Toolbars] 

This sets the area of the touch panel that is reserved for the toolbars. 

Status 

The following screen is displayed if the Status tab is clicked. 

This displays the communication mode of the touch panel device. 

About 

The following screen is displayed if the About tab is clicked. 

This displays the version, support, and licenses of the touch panel program. 



Test 

When you click the Test button, you can test the operation mode of the touch panel. 

Event Selector 

The Event Selector is the tool as switching between the Primary and the Secondary on the touch 

panel. The Primary and the Secondary are set in the Event tab of the Touch Panel Driver setting 

property. 

Starting the Event Selector 

Start the Event Selector by the following procedures. 


2. Select Programs - Gunze - U-TP - Event Selector in that order from the Start 

menu. 


3. The Event Selector starts and the dialog is displayed. 

When it has an icon in the task tray, the Event Selector can also be started with the following 

procedure: 


2. Click the icon in the task tray and select the Event Selector from the pull up menu. 

3. The Event Selector starts and the dialog is displayed. 

Operation 

1. Switching between the Primary and Secondary 

The Primary and Secondary can be switched by tapping the mouse icon in the Event Selector. 

Every time it is tapped, the colors of the right button and the left button of the mouse icon are 

switched. 

This can also be done with Event Selector icon on the task tray. The icons on the dialog and the 

on the task tray are connected. 

When Primary is selected 



Selecting the left button of the mouse icon selects Primary for the touch panel. 

Displayed in Dialog 

Displayed in Tasktray 

When Secondary is selected 

Selecting the right button of the mouse icon selects Secondary for the touch panel. 

Displayed on Dialog 

Displayed on Tasktray 

2. Setting the details 

Detailed items can be set with the pull down menu of the Event Selector. When the right button 

on in the title bar is clicked, the pull down menu is displayed. The setting items are as follows. 

❏ 

❏ 

[One hit] 

This selects the right button of the Event Selector and after that returns it to the left button 

automatically after one click. 

[Icon (Small, Medium, Large)] 

The size of the mouse icon of the Event Selector can be set here. 


❏ 

[Text mode] 

This changes the picture of the mouse icon to the character display. 

Primary operation 

Secondary operation 

❏ 

❏ 

[Always on top] 

When this is selected the Event Selector icon is always displayed on top of other 

applications. 

[About Event Selector] 

This displays about the version information of the Event Selector. 

Touch Panel Driver for MS-DOS 

When the LCD panel is changed or the TTDOS is installed, calibrate the Touch Panel by using 

the calibration. 

Note: 

TTDOS must load before the calibration. 

Follow the procedures below to calibrate. 

1. Type the following: 

TBcal Enter 

2. The Main Menu appears. 

3. Enter “H” to execute the hardware calibration. 

4. Follow the onscreen instructions. 

5. The message “Calibration successful” appears. Press the option key to return the main 

menu. 

6. Next, execute the software calibration. Select and enter the calibration number of the text 

mode or graphics mode. 

Select one of the modes below: 

1.40X25 Text 

2.80X25 Text 

6.640X480 Graphics 

7. An “X” appears on the screen. Touch the center of the “X.” 



8. Then an “X” appears in another location on the screen. Touch the center of the “X.” 

9. The message “Success” appears. Press the option key to return the main menu. 

10. Input X to end the calibration program. 

11. The message “Success” appears. The calibration program has ended. 

HDD Power Down Timer Setting 

When the time the HDD is not accessed exceeds the specified time, the HDD motor can be 

stopped. The method of setting depends on the OS. 

❏ Windows XP Professional This is set with the OS 

❏ Windows 2000 Professional This is set with the OS 

❏ Windows 98 SE This is set with the OS 

❏ Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a This is set with the BIOS 

❏ MS-DOS Ver.6.22 This is set with the BIOS 

Windows XP 

1. Select [Settings]-[Control Panel]-[Performance and Maintenance]-[Power Options] in the 

Start menu of Windows. 

2. [Power Options Properties] is displayed. Click the [Power Schemes] tab. 


3. Select the time in the [Settings for Home/Office Desk power scheme: Turn off hard disks] 

option. 

4. Click [OK]. 

When there is no HDD access for the time set, the HDD Power Down Timer switches over to 

HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops. 

Windows 2000 Professional 

1. Select [Settings]-[Control Panel]-[Power Options] in the Start menu of Windows. 



2. [Power Options Properties] is displayed. Click the [Power Schemes] tab. 


option. 




Windows 98SE 

1. Select [Settings]-[Control Panel]-[Power Management] in the Start menu of Windows. 


2. [Power Management Properties] is displayed. Click the [Power Schemes] tab. 


option. 






Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a 

Controlling the HDD motor is done through the BIOS. For the details, see Chapter 5 “BIOS 

Function.” 

MS-DOS Ver.6.22 

Controlling the HDD motor is done through the BIOS. For the details, see Chapter 5 “BIOS 

Function.” 

Shift to the HDD power ON 

When access to HDD occurs, the motor of HDD begins to start and the HDD becomes accessible. 

MSR Utility for Windows 

This driver is used to change the MSR settings. 

Start menu 

The MSR Utility (PKMODE32.EXE) is stored in the following directory by default. 

C:\Program Files\MSR Config\ 

Start the MSR Utility in either of the following ways. 

❏ 

❏ 

Double-click PKMODE32.EXE from Windows Explorer. 

Select DM-MS Series Config Utilities and then MSR & Keyboard Configuration Utility from 

the Program menu. 


When the program starts, the following screen appears. 

The following paragraphs define each item on the screen: 

❏ 

Ignore MSR/Keyboard Command 

If this check box is checked, all commands to the keyboard firm are not accepted. Typically, 

this check box is checked for use with the external programmable keyboard. It has not been 

checked in the initial setting. 

Note: 

Be careful that if this check box is checked, this utility cannot be started unless the main body is 

turned off or reset. To uncheck this check box, reboot the main body, or, alternatively, start this utility 

with the external keyboard disconnected. 

❏ 

Use MSR Beep 

This is used to sound the beep at the time of reading. 

❏ MSR Track Recognition (ISO/JIS1 Track 1, ISO/JIS1 Track 2, ISO Track 3) 

Check the check box of the track to be read. More than one track may be specified 

accordingly. Track 1,2 and Track 3 have been selected in the initial setting. 

❏ 

MSR Code Type (English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish) 

Selection is made according to the language setting of Windows. 



❏ 

MSR Start/End Sentinels (Card Start, Card End, ISO/JIS1 Track 1 Start, ..., JIS2 Start, JIS2 

End) 

The characters to be prefixed and affixed to the data during the MSR reading are specified. 

It is possible to specify this setting for each card and each track. Leave this field blank if no 

character is to be added. The default settings are as follows: 

Track 1 Start: “%” Track 1 End: “?” 

Track 2 Start: “;” Track 2 End: “?” 

Track 3 Start: “+” Track 3 End: “?” 

Use any of the following special characters: 

Carriage return: “\R” or “\r” 

Tab: 

“\T” or “\t” 

“\”: “\\” 

Others: “\xx” Specified directly with xx, representing character codes as 

hexadecimals. 

Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility for Windows 

Function 

Startup 

When this utility is started, the firmware setting is converted into the setting described in the 

file, and this utility is terminated. 

The Automatic Definition Data Setting utility (PKLOAD32.EXE) has been copied in the directory 

specified in the installation procedure. (If the directory was not specified, this utility has been 

copied in the c:\Program Files\MSR Config directory.) 

This utility can be started by the following method: 

❏ 

Enter as follows from the MS-DOS prompt: 

[Path]PKLOAD32 filename [/n] 

File name: 

/n: 

This is the pas name of the setting file for specifying the key lock setting 

file for Windows or the setting file for this utility. (“***.kyl” file) 

When the [n] option is specified, the following dialog box is displayed at 

the time of termination. 


While the setting is being transferred, the dialog box indicating the situation is displayed. While 

the key lock setting file is being transferred, the following is displayed: 

Writing Configuration #dd-d ... 

where “dd” is the key number, and “d” is the number of retry times up to six. 

While the setting file for this utility is being transferred, the following is displayed: 

Writing Configuration 0xhh-d ... 

where “hh” is the character code when the MSR character conversion setting is in transfer or the 

system conversion area is offset in hexadecimal in any other case, and “d” is the number of retry 

times up to six. 

Note: 

This utility is available only with an English message. 

There is no keyboard or mouse response during reading or writing of settings. 

Do not perform any operation that may cause interruption, such as tapping on the touch panel, during 

reading or writing of settings. 



Setting file 

An example of the setting file for this utility is shown below. 

[General] 

[MSR] 

IgnoreCommands=Off 

SystemParam00=49,0 

SystemParam01=&32,&f7 

Beep=On 

CodeType=US 

ValidTracks=1,2,3,J 

CodeDefinition00=48,10 

CodeDefinition01=&31,11,Shift 

CodeDefinition02=&32,&0A,Ctrl 

CardStart=CS 

CardEnd=CE 

Track1Start=1S 

Track1End=1E 


Track2End=2E 


Track3End=3E 

JIS2Start=JS 

JIS2End = JE 

In the General section, an entry line that may affect the entirety is described, in principle. 

IgnoreCommands may be specified to be On. When it is specified to be On, the setting of the 

keyboard or MSR cannot be read or written. 

SystemParamxx is described when the data is written in the system conversion area. The 

offset and data of the variable are divided with [,] for specification. These two can be 

specified by the byte width in the form of decimal or hexadecimal or character. For the 

decimal specification, it is described as it is. For the hexadecimal specification, & should be 

prefixed. For the character, $ should be prefixed. SystemParamxx may be described in more 

than one file by describing decimal in xx from 00 in order up to 99. 

In the MSR section, an entry that is related to the MSR is described. 

Beep may be specified to be On or Off. When it is specified to be On, beep sounds while the 

MSR is being read. When it is specified to be Off, beep does not sound while the MSR is 

being read. 

CodeType is specified to be US, JP, FR, GR, or SP. The key-in data created while the MSR 

was being read becomes conformable to the keyboard array of the specified country. 


ValidTracks is specified to be 1, 2, 3, or J. When it is specified to be 1, track 1 can be read. 

When it is specified to be 2, track 2 can be read. When it is specified to be 3, track 3 can be 

read. When it is specified to be J, the JIS2 track can be read. More than one file may be 

specified by dividing them with. 

CodeDefinitionxx is described to make the character created while the MSR was being read 

original. The specification is made in order of character code, key number, and concurrent 

pressing key information by dividing them with ,. If not required, the concurrent pressing 

key information can be omitted. The character code and the key number are in the same 

format as that of SystemParamxx. The concurrent pressing key information can be specified 

to be Shift, Ctrl, and Alt. CodeDefinitionxx may also be described in more than one file. For 

xx, specify the decimal in order from 00 up to 99. 

CardStart, CadEnd, Track1Start, Track1End, Track2Start, Track2End, Track3Start, 

Track3End, JIS2Start, and JIS2End are SSs/ESs for reading the MSR. Normal characters, 

including space, can be described as they are. Special characters can be described as \xx, 

where xx is a two-digit hexadecimal. Specifically, line feed, tab and \ (back slash) may be 

described as \n, \t, and \\, respectively. 

The line beginning with “;” is regarded only as a comment line. No comment may be 

described at the right end of the entry line. Generally, no unnecessary space or tab may be 

included. 

MSR Utility for MS-DOS 

Start 

This driver is used to change the MSR settings. 

The MSR utility (PKMODE2.EXE) has been registered in the following directory in the initial 

setting: 

c:\Msrcfg\Pkmode2.exe 

Prepare a floppy disk of MS-DOS that can be booted, and copy this utility onto this floppy disk. 

To start the MSR utility, exit Windows, and reboot the system from MS-DOS. By inputting the 

command name from the keyboard, the utility starts. 

Note: 

To execute this utility, be sure to exit Windows, and reboot the system from MS-DOS beforehand. This 

utility cannot be executed from the DOS box. 

When using the MSR unit, set the USB Keyboard Support of the Integrated Peripherals of BIOS 

disabled. 

To use the MSR unit, execute this utility or the MSR utility for Windows, and set the track to be read. 



Commands 

Run the utility by typing the command in the following format: 

PKMODE2.EXE[MSR] [US|JP|FR|GR|SP] [CMDOFF|CMDON] 

[TK0SS=string] [TK0ES=string] [TK1SS=string] [TK1ES=string] 

[TK2SS=string] [TK2ES=string] [TK3SS=string] [TK3ES=string] 

[TKJSS=string] [TKJES=string] [BEEP=ON|BEEP=OFF] [MSR=m...] 

[KEYTBL=pathname] [/TRACE] [/TRON] [/TROFF] 

[/VAL=xxh,yyh] [/PARA[zzh]] 

Description of parameters: 

MSR: Sets the MSR unit decode to enable the 3-track decodes for Track 1, 

Track 2, and Track 3. 

US: 

Responds with the MSR data in the scan code of the English 101-key 

keyboard (default value). 

JP: 

Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the Japanese 106-key 

keyboard. 

FR: 

Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the French 106-key 

keyboard. 

GR: 

Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the German 106-key 

keyboard. 

SP: 

Responds with the MSR data in the scan decode of the Spanish 106-key 

keyboard. 

CMDOFF: 

Outputs all commands to the external K/B, neglecting the K/B interface 

command. Sets such things as the programming of the POS keyboard 

connected to the external K/B before executing them. According to this 

setting, the command cannot be executed until it is reset or the power is 

turned off. The CMDOFF is cancelled, however, when it is reset or the 

power to the main body is turned off, and the CMDON status is 

resumed. 

CMDON: 

Accepts the command of the K/B interface (default value). 

TK0SS=string: Replaces the start flag in the MSR card unit with the string. The default 

is “ “ (none). 

TK0ES=string: Replaces the end flag in the MSR card unit with the string. The default is 

“ “ (none). 

TK1SS=string: Replaces the 1track start flag of the MSR with the string. The default is 

“%.” 

TK1ES=string: Replaces the 1track end flag of the MSR with the string. The default is 

“?.” 


“;.” 

TK2ES=string: Replaces the 2track end flag of the MSR with the string. The default is 

“?.” 


“+.” 


TK3ES=string: 

TKJSS=string: 

TKJES=string: 

BEEP=ON: 

BEEP=OFF: 

MSR=m...: 

KEYTBL=pathname: 

/TRACE: 

/TRON: 

/TROFF: 

/VAL=xxh, yyh: 

/PARA[zzh]: 

/CODE[zzh]: 

/DATA: 

/KB128=ON: 

/KB128=OFF: 

Replaces the 3track end flag of the MSR with the string. The default is 

“?.” 

Replaces the JIS II type start flag of the MSR with the string. The default 

is “ “ (20th). 

Replaces the JIS II type end flag of the MSR with the string. The default 

is “%” (7th). 

Enables the buzzer sound when the magnetic card is read. This is the 

default setting. When the magnetic card is read in order, the buzzer 

sounds once. When an error is caused to the magnetic card reading, the 

buzzer sounds three times. The LED lights up at the same time. 

Invalidates the sound loaded from the card with the MSR123 and only 

illuminates the LED. 

Specifies the track that enables the MSR decode. The following four 

characters can be specified: 

“1”: ISO/JIS1 type Track 1 



When the same character is specified more than once, an error is caused. 

The default is “123”. “MSR1” is “MSR=12,” and “MSR3” is “MSR=23.” 

Sets the scan code conversion table for converting the MSR data into the 

scan code. This is used for any keyboard other than the U.S. 101-key 

keyboard and the Japan 106-key keyboard. 

Displays the trace information to the standard output. For example, this 

can be saved in a file by using the redirect. 

Enables the trace function. 

Disables the trace function (default value). 

Sets variable xxh to the yyh address of the system. 

Displays the values of the system variables from 00h to FFh. When zzh is 

specified, the SRAM values from zz00h to zzFFh are displayed. 

Displays the content of the Flash ROM in which the firmware codes are 

written. 

Displays zz00h-zzFFh when [zzh] is indicated, and 4000h-40FFh when it 

is omitted. 

Displays the contents of the firmware’s internal RAM. 

When used in combination with KB128 (Programmable keyboard by 

GIGA), this setting is assumed when the LED status display differs from 

the actual input in simultaneous input with an external keyboard. 

Set when the above is released. This setting is the initial value. 

Although there are Other parameters such as “KeyLock”, “/KEY=xxh,yyh,zzh”, “MSR1”, and 

“MSR3”, their use is prohibited in the DM-820 MSR unit. 



Processing details 

The version is displayed as Firmware Version= V3.00. To obtain detailed version information, 

execute PKUPDT2.EXE. 

Note: 

This definition utility operates on MS-DOS. It does not operate in a DOS box (in Windows). Be sure to 

start MS-DOS before Executing. 

Because this MSR utility uses a keyboard interface in communication with the firmware, operation of an 

external keyboard and MSR read operations are strictly prohibited during execution. If such operation is 

performed, errors may occur in data communication and proper operation may become impossible. 

Reset or power OFF are strictly prohibited during operation of this MSR utility. Correct operation will 

become impossible as it is not possible to conclude processing. 

If executed with “CMDOFF” parameters, commands will not be received at all until Reset or Power OFF. 

Messages 

The following message is displayed when the utility starts. 

EPSON POS Keyboard Configuration Utility Vx.xx.xx 

Firmware Version= Vx.xx.xx 


As parameters execute correctly, the following messages are displayed: 

Status messages 

Parameter 

MSR1 

MSR 

US 

JP 

FR 

GR 

SP 

CMDOFF 

CMDON 

TK0SS 

TK0ES 

TR?SS 

TK?ES 

TKJSS 

TKJES 

BEEP=ON 

BEEP=OFF 

MSR=m.. 

KEYTBL 

Message 

MSR track1 

MSR default 

US 101 keyboard 

JP 106 keyboard 

French keyboard 

German keyboard 

Spanish keyboard 

Command Function OFF 

Command Function ON 

Card Start Sentinel = string 

Card End Sentinel = string 

Track? Start Sentinel = string 

Track? End Sentinel = string 

JIS2 Start Sentinel = string 

JIS2 End Sentinel = string 

MSR Beep ON 

MSR Beep OFF 

MSR track m.. 

Set KeyTable 

/TRACE, /TRON, /TROFF See [ ] 

/VAL= 

Set Addr[VAL]=xxh[yyh] 

/PARA, /CODE, /DATA *** Parameter Dump *** 

ADDR: +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F 

0123456789ABCDEF 

0000: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 - 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F ................ 

0010: 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 - 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 

0123456789:;? 

.... 

00E0: 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 - 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 

@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO 

00F0: 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 - 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 

PQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_ 

KEYL 

/KEY= 

KB128=ON 

KB128=OFF 

KeyLock Position 

SetKey data=ii ofs=jj num=kk 

KB128 mode ON 

KB128 mode OFF 

* ? is 1, 2, or 3. 



Completion messages are shown below: 

Completion messages 

Message 

Firmware old version or invalid... 

Invalid parameter 

Communication error 

Invalid pathname 

Description 

Firmware version error, etc. 

Parameter error 

Communication error 

File error 

Automatic Definition Data Setting Utility For MS-DOS 

Outline 

This utility automatically sets the definition information of the POS keyboard of the IM-800. 

Command 

Execute the command in the following format: 

c:\Msrcfg\PKLOAD.EXE data-file 

Processing details 

This utility automatically sets the following data: 

• Setting file for this utility (.PKL) 

Be sure to specify the extension of the specified file because the effectiveness of the specified file 

is checked with its extension. The download function of the upload file is realized by 

PKUPDT2.EXE. 

Note: 

This utility is started from and executed on MS-DOS. (It cannot be executed from the DOS box.) 

This utility uses the K/B interface for communication with the firmware. For this reason, do not operate 

the MSR, or the external keyboard during the execution or an error is caused during the data 

communication, and this utility cannot start in order. 

Do not reset this utility or turn off the power to the main body during the execution of this utility. 


Messages 

Messages 

Message 

EPSON POS Keyboard Auto Definition Utility Vx.xx.xx 

Usage: 

PKLOAD data-file 

data-file: definition data file 

.K84 :84Key definition data 

.K28 :28Key definition data 

.KYL :KeyLock definition data 

.$$$ :PKUPLD saved data 

.FLD :PKUPLD2 saved data 

.PKL :PKMODE definition data 


Now transfer 28Key Definition data ......... 


Now transfer 84Key Definition data ......... 


Now transfer KeyLock Definition data ......... 

The message like that of PKMODE.EXE is displayed. 

For information, see the table “Status messages” on page 4-86. 

Description 

During startup 

Usage 

28-key definition data transfer 

84-key definition data transfer 

Key lock definition data transfer 

PKMODE definition data transfer 

Error messages 

Message 

Firmware version error and others 

Invalid parameter 

Firmware communication error 

File access error: No such file or directory 

Description 

Firmware version error and others 

Parameter error 

Firmware communication error 

File access error 

Ending codes 

Ending codes 

Ending code 

Description 

0 Normal termination 

10 Wrong firm version or execution on other PC (abnormal termination) 

11 Parameter error (abnormal termination) 

14 Error in communication with the firmware (abnormal termination) 

20 Error during file access (abnormal termination) 

21 Abnormal file data format (abnormal termination) 

File format 

The setting file for this utility is created by using a text editor or other device. The extension of 



this file should be specified as [.PKL]. The format has the following sections and entries: 

File format 

Section 

Entry 

Parameter 

(underlined parameters 

are the default values) 

Remarks 

[General] 

Fixed value. Be sure to describe at the start. 

Version PKL100 Fixed value. Be sure to describe at the start. 

IgnoreCommands Selected from Off and On Be careful that if On is selected, the subsequent 

commands are not accepted. 

SystemParam00 

Set in the Offset and Value formats. 

00h < Offset ≤ FFh, 00h ≤ Value ≤ FFh 

[MSR] 

ValidTracks Selected from 1, 2, and 3 Selection of more than one value may be 

selected. 

Beep 

CodeType 

On, Off 

US, JP, FR, GR, SP 

CardStart 

CardEnd 

Track1Start 

Track1End 

Track2Start 

Track2End 

Track3Start 

Track3End 

JIS2Start 

For information on input enabled characters, see 

SS/ES Code Input Enabled Characters. 

[, |] are characters and can be input. 

Input the hexadecimal as [\nn] within a range 

from [01h] to [7Fh]. 

Effective up to 7 characters. The 8th character 

and those thereafter are neglected. 

Because even the line-feed character is 

effective, do not carelessly input a space or a 

tab. 

JIS2End 

CodeDefinition00 

See “Code Conversion Entry” on page 4-90 for 

further details. 

When nothing is described after the entry, the entry setting is deleted. 

For Sysparam00 and CodeDefinition00, set numeric numbers in a range from 00 to 99. Set the numeric values one 

by one in ascending order. Do not input the same numeric value for more than one. 


The default setting (U.S. mode) is described as follows: 

[General] 

Version=PKL100 

IgnoreCommands=Off 

[MSR] 

ValidTracks=1,2,3 

Beep=On 

CodeType=US 

CardStart= 

CardEnd= 

Track1Start=% 

Track1End=? 

Track2Start=; 

Track2End=? 

Track3Start=+ 

Track3End=? 

Code Conversion Entry 

CodeDefinitionNN = Character Code, Key Number, Shift Mode 

CodeDefinitionNN 

Character Code 

Key Number 

Shift Mode 

Shift 

Control 

Alt 

: Specifies the character code to be defined. 'c' defines whether a character 

or numeral has been specified. Example: 'A' 0x41 65 

: Sets values between 01h and 7Fh 

: Specifies the key numbers shown in the table below 

: Concurrent pressing key information 

: Used for the scan codes with the Shift key 

: Used for the scan codes with the Ctrl key 

: Used for the scan codes with the Alt key 

110 

Esc 

112 

F1 

113 114 

F2 F3 

115 

F4 

116 117 

F5 F6 

118 

F7 

119 

F8 

120 121 122 123 

F9 F10 F11 F12 

124 125 126 

PrSc ScLk Pause 

1 

Kanji 

16 

Tab 

2 

1 

30 

CapsLock 

44 

Shift 

58 

Ctrl 

17 

Q 

3 

2 

31 

A 

4 

3 

18 19 

W E 

32 

S 

45 46 

Z 

60 

47 

X 

5 

4 

33 

D 

20 

R 

6 

48 

C 

131 

5 

21 

T 

34 

F 

49 

V 

Alt Not converted 

7 

6 

35 

G 

22 

Y 

50 

B 

8 

7 

36 

H 

61 

Space 

23 

U 

51 

N 

9 

8 

37 

J 

24 

10 

9 

I 

38 

K 

52 

M 

132 

Converted 

25 

O 

11 

0 

39 

L 

26 

P 

53 

, 

54 

. 

133 

Hiragana 

12 

- 

40 

; 

27 

@ 

55 

/ 

62 

Alt 

13 

^ 

41 

: 

28 

[ 

56 

¥ 

14 

¥ 

42 

] 

15 

BS 

75 

Insert 

29 76 

Delete 

43 

Enter 

57 

Shift 

64 

Ctrll 

79 

← 

80 

Home 

81 

End 

83 

↑ 

84 

↓ 

85 

PgUp 

86 

Pgdn 

89 

→ 

90 

Num 

Lock 

91 

7 

92 

4 

93 

1 

99 

95 100 105 

/ * - 

96 101 

8 9 

97 

5 

98 

2 

0 

102 

6 

103 

3 

104 

Del 

106 

+ 

108 

Enter 

List of key numbers (keys shaded in gray cannot be set) 


MR series Technical Reference Manual 

Chapter 5 

BIOS Functions 

The IM-800 system ROM stores the following BIOS-related utilities. This chapter describes these 

utilities. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

BIOS setup 

Defaults and selectable options 

Power on self-test (POST) 

Device diagnostic utility 

HDD Power Down Timer Setting 

The HDD Power Down Timer settings are made through the OS in Windows XP/2000/98, but 

in Windows NT/95 and DOS, the settings are made through the BIOS, as detailed below. To 

have the HDD motor stop when the HDD is not accessed for a certain time, follow the steps 

below: 

1. Start up the BIOS Setup Utility. 

2. Select [Power Management Setup]. 

3. Select [HDD Power Down]. 

4. Select the time in the option. 

5. Save it and restart. 

After the restart, when there is no HDD access for the time set, the HDD Power Down Timer 

switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops. 

Note: 

This function can be used only with BIOS version 2.13.00 or higher. If your BIOS version is before 2.12, 

upgrade the BIOS and then do the above procedure. 


BIOS Setup 

The BIOS setup menu utility is used to configure the system’s operating environment. When 

setting up this product for the first time, be sure to run this program. If you change the operating 

environment, run this program again. 

This section explains BIOS version 2.13. 

Rev. I BIOS Functions 5-1

Operating Procedure 

How to use setup 

To execute BIOS setup requires a PS/2-compatible keyboard. BIOS setup cannot be run from the 

touch panel alone. 

Start the BIOS setup utility using the following procedure: 

1. Connect the keyboard to the keyboard/mouse connector. 

2. Turn the power on to start up the MR series. 

3. Press Del during the POST process, and the BIOS setup utility will start up. 

How to exit 

Follow the steps below to enable your changes for a new configuration and to exit the BIOS 

setup utility: 

1. Display the BIOS setup main menu. 

2. Select Save & Exit Setup, and press Enter. 

3. The message SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)? is displayed. Press Y and Enter in this 

order to exit the BIOS setup utility, validate the changed settings, and reboot the system. 

Follow the procedure below to cancel changes and exit the BIOS setup utility. 

1. Display the BIOS setup main menu. 

2. Select Exit Without Saving, and press Enter. 

3. The message Quit Without Saving (Y/N)? is displayed. Press Y and Enter. 

4. The BIOS setup utility finishes, and the system reboots with the new configuration canceled. 

CAUTION: 

Do not change the settings of any items other than those specified in this manual. Do 

not change the settings of any items for which “Do not change” is specified in this 

manual. If an incorrect setting is made, the MR series may not operate. 

The help display 

Press F1 in each menu to open the Help window for key operations. Press Esc to exit from the 

help window. 


If the computer fails to boot up after you make a change with the BIOS setup utility, start the 

BIOS setup utility, and run Load Optimized Defaults. 

If the system cannot start up, use the jumpers to clear the CMOS. Short pins 2 and 3 of JP10 for 

main board, and the CMOS will then be cleared (see "Jumper Settings" in Appendix A). 

5-2 BIOS Functions Rev. I


Changing settings 

To choose an item, first move the cursor onto a desired field with the arrow keys. Next, select a 

value in the field with + (PageUp) or – (PageDown). Finally, select the Save & Exit Setup 

command in the main menu, which saves the currently displayed values of all the menus. 

BIOS Setup Main Menu 

The BIOS setup main menu contains the following items: 

Table A-1 BIOS setup main menu 

Item 

Standard CMOS Features 

Advanced BIOS Features 

Advanced Chipset Features 

Integrated Peripherals 

Power Management Setup 

PnP/PCI Configurations 

Frequency/Voltage Control 

Load Fail-Safe Defaults 

Load Optimized Defaults 

Set Supervisor Password 

Set User Password 

Save & Exit Setup 

Exit Without Saving 

Contents 

Sets the date, time, IDE device items, floppy drive items, video adapter items and 

startup system stop conditions. As the time and date change, these changes are 

reflected on the CMOS. When executing the Load Fail-Safe Defaults or the Load 

Optimized Defaults a prescribed value is preset for items other than the date or 

time. When the “CMOS checksum error - Defaults Loaded” message is displayed, 

execute the “Load Optimized Defaults” and at least confirm or change the date 

and time. 

These features set fundamental BIOS items, such as the cache, POST conditions, 

bootup sequence and memory shadowing. 

These features set items related to memory timing, BIOS code cashing, video 

memory timing and the chipset control timing. Since these settings are executed 

via the Load Optimized Defaults, they are the optimum settings for the system and 

generally do not need to be changed. Be aware that because these settings 

pertain to the control timing, the apparatus may fail to start up if an incompatible 

setting is executed. 

Sets items for controlling the input and output for the IDE controller, the USB 

controller, the parallel port, and the serial port. 

Sets items related to BIOS based power regulation of the power management 

timer, wake-up event and timer reset event. 

Sets items related to system resource allocation of IRQ numbers and DMA channel 

numbers. 

This menu is used to set items related to clock control; however, it only displays 

items and no selection can be made. The optimum value is set for each item by 

the BIOS at startup. 

The load fail/Safe defaults are executed when the minimum preset prescribed 

values required for the startup are set for each item. This function is only provided 

for troubleshooting and is normally not used. 

The load optimized defaults are executed when preset prescribed values are set 

for each item so that the system operates under optimum conditions. It is also 

executed when the “CMOS checksum error - Defaults Loaded” message is 

displayed and each item is restored to its prescribed value. 

This function sets the system protection password. The password can be set for up 

to 8 characters (case-sensitive). The input demand timing for the password setting 

differs according to the setting for Advanced BIOS Features: Security Option. 

This function sets the system protection password. The password can be set for up 

to 8 characters (case-sensitive). The input demand timing for the password setting 

differs according to the setting for Advanced BIOS Features: Security Option. 

This is executed at restart after saving CMOS content changes. 

This is executed at restart without saving CMOS changes (cleared). 


Standard CMOS Features Menu 

In this menu, set the system clock and the calendar, set the disk drive parameters and the type of 

video subsystem, select among the error types that interrupt the power on self-test (POST), and 

so on. 

Table A-2 Standard CMOS Features menu 

Items 

Date 

Time 

IDE Primary Master 

IDE Primary Slave 

IDE Secondary Master 

IDE Secondary Slave 

IDE HDD Auto- 

Detection 

(IDE Primary 

Master) 

(IDE Primary 

Slave) 

(IDE Secondary 

Master) 

Description 

Sets the date. (BIOS automatically determines the day of the week.) Press ← or 

→ to move to the desired field (date, month, year). Press PgUp or PgDn to 

incrementally move the setting, or type the desired value into the field. 

Sets the clock in 24-hour format. 

For example, 1 p.m. is 13:00:00. Press ← or → to move to the desired field. Press 

PgUp or PgDn to incrementally move the setting, or type the desired value into 

the field. 

When selecting items marked with a “>”, such as the IDE device setting (IDE 

Primary Master), the screen for selecting options is displayed and specifications 

can be set. 

Push the Enter key to execute the auto detection for the device. If the 

connection is made, information obtained from the device, including the 

access method, will be applied. 

Set the detection method for the connection device. 

None: The connection detection is not executed. It is treated as 

disconnected software 

Auto: Auto detection is executed. The information held by the device is 

automatically applied. 

Manual: The information set by the user is applied. 

(IDE Secondary 

Slave) 

Access Mode 

Capacity 

Cylinder 

Set the access Method to the connected device. Note that when the device 

detection method is set as “None” it cannot be changed. 

CHS: Access for the device is shortened with “Cylinder Head Sector 

(Addressing) “having 1024 cylinders, 16 heads and 63 sectors. 

LBA: Shortened with the Logical Block Addressing Method, the entire 

memory area is divided into access units and those serial numbers are 

used for accessing. 

Large: This is the access method for extended CHS. When the number of CHS 

cylinders exceeds the normal amount of 1024 cylinders, the address is 

not accessible so the CHS is extended. 

Auto: BIOS determines the optimum method based on the information 

obtained by the device. The LBA method is normally used. 

This item indicates the memory capacity for the connection device. The 

following differences occur, depending on the device detection method used. 

Auto: The value calculated according to information obtained by the device 

is displayed. 

Manual: The value calculated according to information specified by the user is 

displayed. 

This item indicates the number of cylinders for the connection device. The 


Auto: The value obtained by the device is displayed. 

Manual: The user can set the value within a range of 0-65,535 only when the 

access method is set as “CHS”. 



Table A-2 Standard CMOS Features menu (continued) 

Items 

Description 

Head 

Precomp 

Landing Zone 

Sector 

This item indicates the number of heads for the connection device. The 



Manual: The user can set the value within a range of 0-255 only when the 


This item indicates the number of write compensation cylinders for the 

connection device. The following differences will occur, depending on the 

device detection method used. 



access method is set as “CHS”. (When connecting a device for which 

there is no particular value specified, a maximum value of 65,535 is 

specified) 

This item indicates the head fixed track number for the connection device. The 

following differences will occur, depending on the device detection method 

used. 




there is no particular value specified, the number “1” is specified as the 

maximum number of cylinders). 

This item indicates the number of sectors for the connection device. The 


used. 




Drive A 

Drive A type is set. The definition for each setting is as follows. 

None: This setting is used when the FDD is disconnected or when the FDD is not 

loaded. Please note that when this setting is used, system resources, 

such as the IRQ cannot be opened. When you want to open the 

system resources when using this setting, select “Disabled” under 

Integrated Peripherals: Onboard FDC Controller, and “Yes” under 

Advanced BIOS Features: Report No FDD For WIN 95. When using this 

setting or the “Disabled” setting for the FDC, be sure to change to the 

Halt On setting. 

360K, 5.25 in.:A 5.25 inch drive cannot be loaded on this device so 5.25 cannot 

be selected as a setting. 

1.2M, 5.25 in.:A 5.25 inch drive cannot be loaded on this device so 5.25 cannot 

be selected as a setting. 

720K, 3.5 in.:The fixes the floppy drive Read/Write to 720KB. Please note that 

since a 720KB Read/Write floppy disk can also be used for a standard 

equipped Read/Write floppy disk set at 3.5 inch and 1.44M, there is 

very little value in using this setting. 

1.44M, 3.5 in.:This is the normal setting. This is the desired setting for both the 

default setting and the Fail-Safe/ Optimized. 

2.88M, 3.5 in.:The standard FDD is not compatible with 2.88MB, so this setting 

cannot be used. 


Table A-2 Standard CMOS Features menu (continued) 

Items 

Video 

Halt On 

Description 

This setting pertains to the type of video adapter being used. Always use the 

“EGA/VGA” setting. Since this setting automatically selects the type of video 

adapter during startup (POST startup phase) and will thus change to “EGA/ 

VGA”. 

Sets the system stop conditions for startup (POST). The definitions for each of the 

settings are as follows. 

All Errors:Use this setting to stop the system when an error occurs. 

No Errors:Use this setting to disregard the occurrence of errors and continue the 

startup process. 

All, But Keyboard:Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs, with 

the exception of keyboard-related errors. This is the default setting for 

both Fail-Safe/ Optimized. 

All, But Diskette:Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs, with 

the exception of floppy disk-related errors. 

All, But Disk/Key:Use this setting to stop the system when any error occurs, with 

the exception of floppy disk or keyboard-related errors. 

Notes: When selecting items marked with a “>”, such as the IDE device setting (IDE Primary Master), the screen for 

selecting options is displayed and specifications can be set. 



Advanced BIOS Features Menu 

In this menu, set the basic BIOS settings, such as cache, boot-up sequence, and memory 

shadowing. 

Table A-3 Advanced BIOS Features menu 

Items 

Virus Warning 

External Cache 

CPU L2 Cache 

ECC Checking 

Processor 

Number Feature 

(This is displayed 

only when the 

CPU is in the 

Pentium III 

family.) 

Quick Post 

Quick Power On 

Self Test 

First Boot Device 

Second Boot 

Device 

Third Boot 

Device 

Description 

This is the setting for the data write enable/ disable to the boot sector and partition table. For 

the default setting, Fail-Safe is “Enabled” and Optimized is “Disabled”. 

Enabled:This is the setting used to disable the write function. Although this setting protects the 

system from viruses, it does not permit execution of FDISK or FORMAT. 

Disabled:This is the setting used to enable the write function. Although FDISK and FORMAT can 

be executed using this setting, it does not protect the system from viruses. Always use 

the default setting. 

This setting enables/disables the L2 Cache inside the CPU. 

Enabled:Enables the L2 Cache. This is the normal setting. 

Disabled:Disables the L2 Cache. This setting may have an adverse effect on the system 

performance. 

This is the setting that enables/disables the ECC check for the L2 Cache in the CPU. The default 

setting is “Enabled”. 

Enabled:This setting is used to perform the ECC check. This is the normal setting. 

Disabled:This setting is used when the ECC check is not performed. 

This is a function for specifying whether or not to acquire the serial number of a CPU model 

added from the Pentium III processor. 

Note that the default setting is "enabled" regardless of the model. 

The BIOS acquires the family number of the CPU at startup and controls whether or not this item 

is displayed, as follows: 

Pentium III:This item is displayed and the setting can be changed. 

Note that in the case of the Pentium III, changing the setting to "disabled" has no effect. It is 

treated the same way as if "enabled" were set in processing. 

Celeron: This item is not displayed and the setting cannot be changed. 

See Intel Processor Identification and the CPUID Instruction, published by Intel Corporation, for 

the details of the CPU information. 

Sets POST processing conditions. The default setting Quick Post is set as “Disabled” and the 

Quick Power On Self Test is set as “Enabled”. 

Enabled:This setting is used to perform the memory test when rebooting after resetting the 

software or when auto detection of the IDE device is omitted. This makes it possible to 

reduce the time required for rebooting via software reset. 

Disabled:This setting is used to perform the memory test when rebooting after resetting the 

software or when auto detection of the IDE device is not omitted. 

Sets POST processing conditions. The default setting Quick Post is set as “Disabled” and the 

Quick Power On Self Test is set as “Enabled”. 

Enabled:This setting is used to execute the POST processing (memory self diagnostic test) only 

once during startup. This setting can be used to reduce the time required for startup. 

The ESC key may be pressed during POST to skip the processing. 

Disabled:This setting is used to execute the POST processing (memory self diagnostic test) 

several times during startup. The ESC key may be pressed during POST to skip the 

processing. 

This setting sets the search order for the startup device. The search is performed in the order of 

First -> Second -> Third device and starts up from the first device that is capable of performing 

the startup (one that has a boot sector and that can be loaded with IPL). 

For both the default setting and Fail-Safe/Optimized, the settings are First =”Floppy”, Second 

=”HDD-0” and Third = “SCSI”. Change the setting so that it is compatible with the system 

configuration. 


Table A-3 Advanced BIOS Features menu (continued) 

Items 

Boot Other 

Device 

Description 

Even if a device search is performed in the order of First/Second/Third Boot Devices, and a 

device that is capable of performing the startup is not found, this setting can be used to 

execute/not execute the Boot Other Device function. The default setting is set as “Enabled”. 

Change the setting so that it is compatible with the system configuration. 

Enabled:This setting is used to search for another device that is capable of performing the 

startup. 

Disabled:This setting is used to disable the search for another device that is capable of 

performing the startup. 

Reference: Information concerning the boot sequence 

If bootable SCSI drives (e.g., HDD and CD-ROM) are connected, some products give priority to 

such SCSI Drives regardless of the First Boot Device, Second Boot Device, Third Boot Device, 

and Boot Other Device settings. This is due to the specifications of the SCSI BIOS (adapters) in 

question. 

Boot Up Floppy 

Seek 

Boot Up 

NumLock Status 

Gate A20 

Option 

Typematic Rate 

Setting 

Typematic Rate 

(Chars/Sec) 

Typematic 

Delay (Msec) 

This setting is used to enable/disable the head seek test (either execute or not execute the 

head seek command) for floppy drive A during the startup. The default setting is “Enabled”. 

Enabled:This setting is used to execute the head seek test. If the Standard CMOS Features: Drive 

is set as “None” and the Integrated Peripherals: Onboard FDC Controller is changed to 

“Disabled”, then if the Standard CMOS Features: Halt On is set as “All Errors” or the All, 

But Keyboard setting is used, system errors will halt. 

Disabled:This setting is used to disable the head seek test. Although this setting will reduce the 

amount of time required to perform the head seek for the floppy during startup, it does 

not perform an accurate error detection of FDD errors. 

This setting turns the NumLock on the keyboard On or OFF (executes or does not execute the 

NumLock command). The default setting is “OFF”. 

Off: This setting is used to turn the NumLock Off. 

On: This setting is used to turn the NumLock On. 

This setting is used to set the access method for a memory space of more than 1MB. The default 

setting should be “Normal” for Fail-Safe and “Fast” for Optimized. 

Normal: This setting is used only for access methods (real mode access) Pertaining to the 

conventional AT transposing apparatus which use a keyboard controller. 

Fast: This setting is used for the Gate A20 function for the chip set. This is the original setting 

used to perform automatic switching between the real mode and the protect mode. 

This setting is used to enable/disable changes to the repeat conditions. The default setting is 

“Disabled”. 

Disabled:This setting is used when the apparatus is to be used at a fixed setting, without 

changing the number of repetitions or the intervals between repetitions. For the fixed 

setting, a repetition occurs once every 6 seconds with intervals of 250 msec. This is the 

normal setting. 

Enabled:This setting is used when the number of repetitions and the intervals between 

repetitions is changed. For details, refer to Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec.) and 

Typematic Delay (Msec). 

This setting is used by to determine how many times an entry is made in a one-second period 

when a key is held down. The fixed setting is 6 times per second. Additional settings are 8, 10, 12, 

15, 20, 24 and 30. 

This setting is used to set the number of Msec for the intervals between data when a key is held 

down. The fixed setting is 250 Msec. Additional settings are 500, 750 and 1000. 



Table A-3 Advanced BIOS Features menu (continued) 

Items 

Security Option 

OS Select For 

DRAM > 64MB 

HDD S.M.A.R.T 

capability 

Report No FDD 

For WIN95 

C8000-CBFFF 

Shadow 

CC000-CFFFF 

Shadow 

D0000-D3FFF 

Shadow 

D4000-D7FFF 

Shadow 

Description 

Sets the password entry timing. The default setting is “Setup”. The password is set in Main Menu: 

Set Supervisor Password and Main Menu: Set User Password.If a password is not set in these 

items, this setting will have no significance. 

The relationships between this setting and the password set are as follows: 

“Setup” Setting 

“System” Setting 

When starting the OS: --- User Password or Supervisor Password 

When changing BIOS Setup: Supervisor Password Supervisor Password 

When only displaying BIOS Setup: User Password User Password 

This setting is used to specify whether the OS/2 has more than 64MB of memory or not. The 

default setting is “Non-OS2”. 

Non-OS2:This setting is used when an OS other than an OS2 is used. This is the normal setting. 

OS2: This setting is used when the OS is an OS2. By using this setting, the method for 

communicating the mounted memory capacity changes to a method specified by 

the OS2. 

This setting is used to specify whether the S.M.A.R.T (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting 

Technology) function is being used or not. If the connection device is not compatible with ATA- 

3 (Ultra-ATA) standards or above, this means that the device does not support the S.M.A.R.T. 

function, making this setting invalid. The default setting is "Enabled". 

Enabled:"Enabled" is used to set the S.M.A.R.T. function. Please note that in order to use this 

setting a command device is necessary to initiate this function during startup and a 

separate software package is needed to activate the S.M.A.R.T. function. This is the 

normal setting. 

Disabled:This setting is used to disable the S.M.A.R.T function. 

This setting is used to communicate to the Microsoft Windows OS whether an FDD is installed or 

not (more exactly, the IRQ-6 status) The default setting is "No". 

No: "No" is the setting used when no communication is made to the OS. This is the normal 

setting. 

Yes: This setting is used when an FDD is not installed or when the necessary software has not 

been installed. More exactly, this setting is used to communicate to the OS that the 

IRQ-6 used by the FDC has been opened. Please refer to the section on floppy disks 

regarding the use of FDD. 

This setting is used to specify whether shadowing is performed or not for each address space 

when a PC card with an expanded ROM BIOS is attached to the slot. All default settings are set 

to "Disabled". 

Disabled:This setting is used when shadowing of the target address spaces is not performed. 

More exactly, if no PC card is attached to the slot, then it means that the PC card 

does not have an expanded ROM BIOS mounted on it. 

Enabled:This setting is used when shadowing of the target address spaces is performed. More 

exactly, it means that the PC card attached to the slot has an expanded ROM BIOS, 

such as an SCIS network card, mounted on it. 

D8000-DBFFF 

Shadow 

DC000-DFFFF 

Shadow 

Small Logo 

(EPA) Show 

This setting is used to enable/disable display of an energy star logo at the top right of the POST 

screen. The default setting is set as "Disabled". 

Disabled:The "Disabled" setting disables the display. 

Enabled:The "Enabled" setting enables the display. 


Advanced Chipset Features Menu 

In this menu, set the items that rely on the chipset on the main board, such as the memory, the 

bus timing, and the system temperature setting. Since these settings are executed via Load 

Optimized Defaults, they are the optimum settings for the system and generally do not need to 

be changed. Be aware that because these settings pertain to the control timing, the apparatus 

may fail to start up if an incompatible setting is executed. 

Table A-4 Advanced Chipset Features menu 

Items 

SDRAM CAS 

Latency Time 

System BIOS 

Cacheable 

Video BIOS 

Cacheable 

CPU Latency 

Timer 

Delayed 

Transaction 

CAS# Latency 

Paging Mode 

Control 

RAS-to-CAS 

Override 

RAS# Timing 

RAS# Precharge 

Timing 

Description 

This setting sets the number of clocks for the CAS waiting time for the memory (the time 

required from when the address is specified until the data can be read out). Default setting is 

“3”. 

The use of the default value of "3" is recommended in order to achieve a stable system 

operation. Although performance improves with the setting of "2," the system may become 

unstable. In such a case, change the setting to "3." 

This setting enables/disables the System BIOS cache. The default setting is "Disabled". 

Disabled: Set this to disable the system BIOS cache. 

Enabled: Set this to enable the system BIOS cache. 

This setting enables/disables the Video BIOS cache. The default setting is "Disabled". 

Disabled: Set this to disable the system BIOS cache. 

Enabled: Set this to enable the system BIOS cache. 

CPU and Chip set (GMCH: this setting pertains to the access timing for the Graphics Memory 

Control Hub). The default setting is "Disabled". The normal setting is "Disabled". 

Always set this to “Enabled“. 

This setting sets the number of clocks for the video cache memory CAS waiting period (the 

amount of time required after the address is specified until the data can be read out). There 

are 2 options, a setting of "2" or "3". The default setting is "3". The normal setting is "3" to ensure a 

more stable system. 

This setting controls the page mode for the video cache memory. The options are "Open" and 

"Close". The default setting is "Open". The normal setting is "Open" because it operates in the 

page open mode. 

This setting determines how much time is required until performing the transfer to CAS following 

the video cache memory RAS. The options are the "by CAS# LT setting and the "Override(2)" 

setting. The default setting is the "by CAS# LT setting. Normally, the CAS# Latency setting is used 

to automatically set the "by CAS# LT" setting. 

This setting is used to set the RAS access timing for the video cache memory. The two options 

are "Fast" and "Slow". The default setting is "Fast". Normally, the "Fast" setting is used to ensure 

better performance. 

This setting sets the number of clocks to allocate to RAS in order to accumulate the necessary 

charge before refresh of the video cache memory is performed. There are two options, "Fast" 

and "Slow". The default setting is "Fast". Normally, the "Fast" setting is used to ensure better 

performance. 



Integrated Peripherals Menu 

This menu sets the items related to I/O ports such as the IDE controller, the transfer mode, the 

serial ports, and the parallel port. 

Table A-7 Integrated Peripherals menu 

Items 

On-Chip Primary 

PCI IDE 

On-Chip 

Secondary PCI 

IDE 

IDE Primary 

Master PIO 

IDE Primary 

Slave PIO 

IDE Secondary 

Master PIO 

IDE Secondary 

Slave PIO 

IDE Primary 

Master UDMA 

IDE Primary 

Slave UDMA 

IDE Secondary 

Master UDMA 

IDE Secondary 

Slave UDMA 

USB Controller 

USB Keyboard 

Support 

USB Mouse 

Support 

Description 

This setting is to enable/disable the IDE controller housed in the chip set (ICH2). All of the default 

settings are set as "Enabled". Always use the default "Enabled" setting. 

If the "Disabled" settings are used, the IRQ resources are released and become available for 

other devices. If the IRQ resources that are released, IRQ-14 is released for the primary and IRQ- 

15 for the secondary. 

This setting sets the transfer mode for the IDE device connected to each interface. All of the 

default settings are "Auto". The PIO is normally set as "Auto," but due to the auto detection 

performed during POST, the optimum method used by the connection device is then set as 

BIOS. 

If devices in different modes are connected to the master and the slave, the transfer mode will 

be fixed at a slow speed; therefore, it is necessary to pay particular attention to the connection 

to each port. If a setting is made that exceeds the maximum mode supported by the device 

connected, note that data errors may occur. If On-Chip Primary/Secondary PCI IDE is set to 

"Disabled," the corresponding items cannot be selected. 

This setting sets the DMA transfer mode for the IDE device connected to each interface. All 

default settings are set as "Auto". The UDMA is normally set as "Auto, but due to the auto 

detection performed during the POST, the DMA mode support status for the connection device 

is determined as BIOS. 

If any of the devices connected does not support DMA mode, the maximum mode that 

device supports will be set. If On-Chip Primary/Secondary PCI IDE is set to "Disabled," the 

corresponding items cannot be changed. 

When using the UDMA, set as “Auto“ 

The transfer mode for the DMA mode compatible device connected to the IDE interface in 

each OS can be changed to the DMA mode using the following methods. For BIOS settings, set 

IDE ... UDMA to "Auto." This has been supported for the OS for EPSON. 

1. MS-DOS) Do not set the DMA mode. 

2. Windows NT Using a tool in Service Pack 6a, Refer to “Chapter 4“ 

3. Windows 98 Setting the OS, Refer to “Chapter 4“ 

4. Windows 2000 By applying Chip Set Driver, the mode can be automatically changed to 

the DMA mode. 

5. Windows XP The DMA mode is automatically set upon installing the Windows XP 

operating system. 

This setting is used to enable/disable the USB controller housed in the chip set (ICH2). 

The default setting is set as "Enabled". 

Perform setting according to your system configuration (whether or not a USB device is 

connected). If the "Disabled" setting is used, neither USB Keyboard Support or USB Mouse 

Support can be selected and these functions are not supported. The IRQ resource settings for 

the USB controller is performed by using PnP/PCI Configurations: Assign IRQ For USB. Therefore, it 

is not possible to release the IRQ resources by only changing this setting to "Disabled." 

Also, it is not possible to set Port-0/1 (rear connector) and Port-2/3 (front connector) separately. 

This setting enables/disables each of the emulation functions for the USB keyboard and the USB 

mouse. The default setting is "Disabled". 

If the USB keyboard and the USB mouse are used just like the PS/2 keyboard and the PS/2 

mouse because the USB is not supported such as in the case of MS-DOS or Windows NT, set 

these items to "Enabled." In the case of an OS that supports the USB such as Windows 98 or later 

version, use the "Disabled" settings. 

If a PS/2 Mouse is used, Set the USB Mouse Support to "Disabled”. 


Table A-7 Integrated Peripherals menu (continued) 

Items 

Init Display First 

AC97 Audio 

Onboard LAN 

Device 

Description 

This setting sets the priority level for the video adapter. The default setting is "Onboard". 

Since the IM-800 uses the video controller housed in the chip set (GMCH) as the priority level, 

use the default setting. 

Onboard: Choose this to give priority to the video controller built in the chip set (GMCH). 

PCI Slot: Choose this to give priority to the video adapter mounted in the PCI slot. 

Regardless of this setting, IRQ resources are allocated for the video controller. 

The IRQ resources for the video controller are set by using PnP/PCI Configurations: Assign IRQ 

For VGA. 

This setting enables/disables the audio controller housed in the chip set (ICH2). 

The default setting is "Auto". Perform setting (using or not using the audio controller) according 

to your system configuration. 

Auto: Choose this if the audio controller built in the chip set (ICH2) is used. 

Disabled: Choose this if the audio controller built in the chip set (ICH2) is not used. 

The IRQ resources for the audio controller are allocated if the "Auto" setting is selected; they are 

not allocated if the "Disabled" setting is selected. 

This setting enables/disables the network controller housed in the chip set (ICH2). 

The default setting is "Enabled".Perform setting (using or not using the network controller) 

according to your system configuration. 

Enabled: Choose this if the network controller built in the chip set (ICH2) is used. 

Disabled: Choose this if the network controller built in the chip set (ICH2) is not used. 

The IRQ resources for the network controller are allocated as follows: 

Enabled: PnP BIOS automatically allocates IRQ resources. 

Disabled: IRQ resources are not allocated. 

IDE HDD Block 

Mode 

Onboard Lan 

Boot ROM 

Onboard FDC 

Controller 

Onboard Serial 

Port 1 

Onboard Serial 

Port 2 

This setting enables/disables the IDE-HDD multi-sector transfer mode. 

The default setting is "Enabled". Always use the default setting. 

Enabled: Choose this to set the multi-sector transfer mode.If data is stored extending over 

continuous sectors, performance will improve. 

Disabled: This sets the single sector transfer mode. 

This setting enables/disables the PXE Boot Agent function. 

When the Onboard LAN Device is "Disabled,” the Onboard Lan Boot ROM setting does not 

function. The default setting is "Enabled." 

Enabled: Choose this if the PXE Boot Agent function is used. 

Disabled: Choose this if the PXE Boot Agent function is not used. 

If the OS incorrectly identifies the PCI I/F Card, use the "Disabled" setting. 

When the setting is "Disabled," the PXE Boot Agent function cannot be used. 

This setting enables/disables the floppy controller inside the S-I/O (W83627). 

The default setting is "Enabled". Always use the default setting. 

Enabled: Choose this if the FDD is used. 

Disabled: Choose this if the FDD is not used. 

This setting enables/disables serial controller #1 (combination of the I/O address and IRQ 

resource for serial port #1) inside the S-I/O (W83627). 

The default setting is "3F8/IRQ4". 

There are 2 options, the "3F8/IRQ4" setting and the "2F8/IRQ3" setting. 

Make the necessary changes in accordance with the system configuration. 

This setting enables/disables serial controller #2 (combination of the I/O address and IRQ 

resource for serial port #2) inside the S-I/O (W83627). 

The default setting is "2F8/IRQ3". 

There are 2 options, the "3F8/IRQ4" setting and the "2F8/IRQ3" setting. 




Table A-7 Integrated Peripherals menu (continued) 

Items 

Onboard 

Parallel Port 

Parallel Port 

Mode 

EPP Mode 

Select 

ECP Mode Use 

DMA 

Description 

This setting enables/disables the parallel controller (combination of the I/O address and IRQ 

resource for the parallel port) inside the S-I/O (W83627). 

The default setting is "278/IRQ7". 

There are 3 options, the "Disabled" setting, "378/IRQ7" setting and the "278/IRQ5" setting. 

When using the "Disabled" setting, system resources can be opened and the port can be used 

with other devices. 


Note that since an 8-byte continuous I/O space is needed when setting the parallel port mode 

to "EPP", the 3BC/IRQ7 setting cannot be used. 

This setting sets the parallel port mode. The default setting is "Normal". 

There are 3 options, "Normal", "EPP" and "ECP". Make the necessary changes in accordance 

with the system configuration. 

Note that since an 8-byte continuous I/O space is needed when using the "EPP" setting, the 

3BC/IRQ7 setting cannot be used. 

In addition, a DMA channel number is required for the DMA transfer when using the "ECP" 

setting. 

The definitions for each mode are listed below. 

Normal: Also called the SPP (Standard Parallel Port), this mode is for one direction only. 

EPP: EPP stands for Enhanced Parallel Port and is an improvement for the Normal mode I/O 

throughput. EPP allows for faster data transfer than Normal mode. 

ECP: ECP stands for Extended Capabilities Port, and it is a mode that supports DMA transfer 

and Run Length Enhanced. ECP allows for faster data transfer. 

EPP Mode Select sets the type of EPP mode. The default setting is "EPP1.7". 

There are 2 options, the EPP1.7 setting and the "EPP1.9 " setting. 


Sets the DMA channel number for the "ECP" and "ECP+EPP" setting. 

The default setting is "3". There are 2 options, "1" and "3". 


POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP Menu 

In this menu, set the items related to power management. 

Table A-5 POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP menu 

Items 

Video Off 

Method 

Video off In 

Suspend 

MODEM Use IRQ 

Description 

Sets the method to turn the monitor off for the Video Off Mode. 

The default setting is DPMS. 

Change the setting to match the system configuration (type of connected monitor). 

The settings are explained below. 

Bland Screen: Use this setting when connecting an earlier version monitor that is 

compatible with power management terminals that only have a video off 

function. 

V/H SYNC+Blank: This stops output of the horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and display 

signal from the video controller. Use this setting for monitors in which power 

management is enabled when these signals end. 

DPMS: 

This activates BIOS control in accordance with the Display Power 

Management System (DPMS) function of the video controller. The monitor 

must be equipped with the DPMS function. 

Use this setting to turn off the video when entering Suspend Mode. 

The default setting is Off. Always use the default setting. 

Off: Choose this to stop video output in Suspend Mode. 

On: With this setting video output continues even in Suspend Mode. 

Use this setting on a system with a modem when access to the modem (IRQ resource trap) is 

treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode or when the power is turned on by a ring signal 

(when the Power On by Ring setting is set to Enabled). The default setting is NA. 

This setting is the IRQ resource number allocated to the modem (serial port). 


Table A-5 POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP menu (continued) 

Items 

Suspend Mode 

Description 

Select the time it takes for the system to enter Suspend Mode by BIOS from option settings. 

The default setting is Disabled. 

Be careful not to set the time value too small as the system may frequently switch between Full- 

On Mode and Suspend Mode. 

Setting for OS 

DOS: Because DOS does not have a suspend timer, use this setting to set the time to enter the 

Suspend mode. 

Windows NT: Because entering the Suspend mode on Windows NT creates a delay in the timer 

of the operating system, be sure that the suspend timer setting is functioning properly. 

Windows 98/2000/XP: For Windows 98 and later operating systems, set the suspend timer from 

the system. The BIOS suspend timer is ignored regardless of the setting. 

HDD Power 

Down 

Soft-Off by PWR- 

BTTN 

Wake-Up by PCI 

card 

Power On by 

Ring 

To have the HDD enter the Power Down mode after a certain period of inactivity, choose the 

time of inactivity in the BIOS from the option setting. 

The default setting is “Disabled”. 

This function was added in Ver.2.13.00. 

Versions 2.12 and before do not have this function. 

Sets the function of the Power Button (switch) when pressed. 

The default setting is Disabled. The basic operations of BIOS are as follows. 

Instant-Off: The power supply is turned off immediately when the Power button is 

pressed. 

Delay 4 Sec.: If the Power button is pressed and held for less than 4 seconds: 

1) Shift to the Suspend mode if this operation is performed in the Full-On 

mode. 

2) Shift to the Full-On mode if this operation is performed in the Suspend 

mode. 

If the Power button is pressed and held for at least 4 seconds: 

1) Shift to the Suspend mode once, and the power supply is forcefully turned 

off after 4 seconds. 

Disabled: 1) Nothing happens when the Power button is pressed in the Full-On mode. 

2) Recover to the Full-On mode when the Power button is pressed in the 

Suspend mode. 

3) If the Power button is pressed and held for at least 4 seconds, the power 

supply is forcefully turned off. 

If the power is forcibly turned off by continuously pressing the power button for at least four 

seconds when "Delay 4 Sec." is set, the Wake On LAN (WOL) function cannot be used next time 

the power is turned on. In this case, restart the system by using the power button and execute 

normal power off by using the OS. The WOL function can then be used at next startup. 

Use this item to have the BIOS perform recovery from the Suspend mode to the Full-On mode 

using the signal from the PC card mounted in the PCI slot, as well as to use the WOL function. 

The default setting is "Disabled." 

Enabled: Choose this to have the BIOS handle as a recovery event or to use the WOL 

function. 

Disabled: Choose this not to have the BIOS handle as a recovery event or not to use the WOL 

function. 

Use this setting enable/disable turning the power on with the modem ring signal. 


Enabled: Choose this if the power is turned on using the ring signal.Also change the setting 

for Modem Use IRQ. 

Disabled: Choose this if the power is not turned on using the ring signal. 



Table A-5 POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP menu (continued) 

Items 

Resume by 

Alarm 

Date (of Month) 

Alarm 

Time (hh:mm:ss) 

Alarm 

Primary IDE 0 

Primary IDE 1 

Secondary IDE 0 


FDD, COM, LPT 

Port 

PCI PIRQ [A-D] 

Description 

Use this setting to turn on the power with the alarm (date and time). Set Resume by Alarm to 

the desired setting to enable or disable this function. 

Enabled: Choose this to enable the alarm function.By selecting this, Date (of Month) Alarm 

and Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm can also be set. 

Disabled: Choose this to disable the alarm function.This is the default setting. 

Use Date (of Month) Alarm to set the appropriate date. 

Use Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm to set the appropriate time. 

Once the setting is made, the power turns on or the system resumes to Full-On Mode on the 

selected day and time each month. 

Sets the event to reload (reset) the BIOS power management timer. 

IDE primary master access (I/O trap) is generated and the power management timer is 

reloaded. This is treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode. 

The default setting is Enabled. 


IDE primary slave access (I/O trap) is generated and the power management timer is 




IDE secondary master access (I/O trap) is generated and the power management timer is 




IDE secondary slave access (I/O trap) is generated and the power management timer is 




Access to the floppy disk drive, serial port 1 or 2, or the parallel port is generated and the power 

management timer is reloaded. This is treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode. 

The default setting is Enabled. Not compatible with PCI slots COM 3/4 ports. 


APCI interrupt request (I/O trap) is generated and the power management timer is reloaded. 

This is treated as a resume event from Suspend Mode 


Supplementary Explanation for Power Management 

Power-Off 

The power-off function for each operating system is as follows. 

DOS 

Since DOS does not have any native power-off function, use one of the following methods. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Set Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN to "Instant-Off" to turn the power supply off by pressing the 

Power button. 

Use the POWER.EXE function to turn the power supply off. 

Make the application use the APM BIOS function to turn the power supply off. 


Windows NT 

With Windows NT, the Restart dialog box is displayed when shutting down the operating 

system, and the system stops and waits for instructions. Therefore, either one of the following 

methods should be used. 

❏ 

❏ 

Set Soft-Off using PWR-BTTN to "Instant-Off" to turn the power supply off when the Power 

button is pressed. 

Change HAL to automatically turn the power supply off when the operating system is shut 

down. 

Windows 98/2000/XP 

When shutdown is executed on Windows 98 and later operating systems, the power is turned 

off using the power-off command from the system. 

Therefore, set the Power button setting to "Disabled" or "Delay 4 Sec." to prevent a power-off 

when the Power button is accidentally pressed and to enable the system to enter the Suspend 

mode when the Power button is pressed. 

Setting of Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN and Power Button Operation 

When the power supply is turned off by pressing the Power button for 4 seconds or more, the 

WOL (Wake On LAN) function cannot be used when the system is started the next time. In 

order to enable the WOL function from this status, reboot the system once and turn the power 

supply off normally (shift to the S4 state by soft-off) from the operating system. 

The Power button operation in the Suspend mode is treated as an event that causes the system to 

recover to the Full-On mode. If the Power button is pressed for 4 seconds or more after 

recovering to the Full-On mode, the power supply is turned off. 

Basically, the mode in each operation system changes as follows when the Power button is 

pressed. 

❏ 

DOS and Windows NT 

Same as the basic operations of the BIOS 

The power supply is turned off if the Power button is pressed for 4 seconds or more. 

❏ Windows 98 and Windows 2000 

BIOS setting Full-On / Video-Off Suspend 

Instant-Off Shutdown Full-On 

Delay 4 Sec. Suspend Full-On 

Disabled No-Operation Full-On 

Since these operation systems support ACPI (PMOS), the settings in the operating system 

are valid and the settings in the BIOS are invalid. 

OS setting Full-On / Video-Off Standby 

Shutdown Shutdown Full-On 

Standby Standby Full-On 



❏ Windows XP 


Since this operation system supports ACPI (PMOS), the settings in the operating system are 

valid and the settings in the BIOS are invalid. 


Video Off Mode 

OS setting Full-On / Video-Off Standby 

Shutdown Shutdown Full-On 

Standby Standby Full-On 

Never No-Operation Full-On 

The BIOS does not have a Video Off function. Therefore, Video Off is directly controlled by the 

operating system or an application. However, Video Off is in effect during the Suspend mode 

activated by the BIOS. 

❏ 

DOS 

Because DOS does not have a Video Off function, Video Off cannot be generated using 

normal operations. Video Off in DOS can, however, be executed by having the application 

directly control the video BIOS and the APM BIOS. 

❏ 

Windows NT 

Because Windows NT does not have a Video Off function, Video Off cannot be generated 

using normal operations. Video Off in Windows NT can, however, be executed by preparing 

a dedicated driver that expands the screensaver or by expanding Win API and having it 

directly controlled by the application. 

❏ 


Windows 98 and later operating systems have a Video Off function. Therefore, this function 

can be used to control Video Off on these operating systems. More specifically, make the 

following settings: 

Windows 98: Set the time for Power Management Properties: Shut Off Monitor. 

Windows 2000: Set the time for Power Schemes: Turn Off Monitor. 

Windows XP: Set the time for Power Schemes: Turn Off Monitor. 

Use these settings to enable the system to enter the Video Off mode after a preset time 

without generating a timer reset event. 

Suspend (Standby) Mode 

The BIOS has a suspend function, but its use varies depending on the operating system. The 

suspend function operates as follows for each operating system. Note that Video Off is executed 

when the Suspend mode is activated by the BIOS. 

❏ 

DOS 

DOS does not have a suspend function. Therefore, suspending is performed either by using 

the suspend function of the BIOS or by an application that directly controls it using the APM 

BIOS. 

❏ 

Windows NT 


Because a delay with the system timer is generated if Windows NT enters the Suspend 

mode, the system is not allowed to enter the Suspend mode. Be aware that the suspend 

timer cannot be set by the BIOS. Also, the Delay 4 Sec. setting cannot be used because 

pressing the Power button when the Power Button setting is set to Delay 4 Sec. would cause 

the system to enter the Suspend mode. 

❏ 


Windows 98 and later operating systems have a standby function. Therefore, this function 

can be used to control suspend on these operating systems. More specifically, make the 

following settings. 

Windows 98: Set the time at Power Management Properties: System Standby. 

Windows 2000: Set the time at Power Schemes: System Standby. 

Windows XP: Set the time at Power Schemes: System Standby. 

Use these settings to enable the system to enter the Suspend mode after a preset time 

without generating a timer reset event. On these operating systems, the suspend function of 

the system is enabled and the BIOS suspend function is ignored. 

Suspend can also be executed by selecting Shut Down or Turn Off from the Start menu and 

then selecting Standby from the Shutdown dialog. 

Hard Disk Drive Power Down Mode 

The HDD Power Down Timer settings are made through the OS in Windows XP/2000/98, but 

in Windows NT/95 and DOS, the settings are made through the BIOS, as detailed below. To 

have the HDD motor stop when the HDD is not accessed for a certain time, follow the steps 

below: 

1. Start up the BIOS Setup Utility. 

2. Select [Power Management Setup]. 

3. Select [HDD Power Down]. 

4. Select the time in the option. 

5. Save it and restart. 

After the restart, when there is no HDD access for the time set, the HDD Power Down Timer 

switches over to HDD Power Down and the motor of the HDD stops. 

Note: 

This function can be used only with BIOS version 2.13.00 or higher. If your BIOS version is before 2.12, 

upgrade the BIOS and then do the above procedure. 



Windows 98 and later operating systems have a hard disk drive power down function. 

Therefore, this function can be used to control hard disk drive power down in these 

operating systems. 



PNP/PCI Configurations Menu 

In this menu, set the IRQ and DMA assignment methods and other items. Do not change the 

default settings under normal conditions. 

Table A-6 PNP/PCI Configurations menu 

Items 

PNP OS Installed 

Reset 

Configuration 

Data 

Resource 

Controlled By 

IRQ Resources 

DMA Resources 

Memory 

Resources 

PCI/VGA 

Palette Snoop 

Description 

Use this setting to select whether the operating system is compatible with Plug and Play (PnP). 

The default setting is Yes. Always use the default setting. 

Use this setting to reset the PnP information recorded in the Extended System Configuration 

Data (ESCD) block when restarting the system. 

The default setting is Disabled. Always use the default setting. 

Use this setting to select whether the allocation of the I/O address, IRQ, DMA, and other system 

resources is to be done by PnP BIOS or by the user. 

The default setting is Auto (ESCD). Always use the default setting. 

Sets the handling of IRQ Resources (interrupt number). 

You can change IRQ Resources 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. 

The default setting is PCI/ISA PnP for each resource. 

PCI/ISA PnP: The target IRQ resources are allocated automatically (dynamic allocation) 

by PnP BIOS, as is the case when the Resource Controlled By setting is set to 

Auto (ESCD). 

Legacy ISA: The target IRQ resources are reserved (static allocation) and are not 

affected by the PnP BIOS automatic (dynamic) allocation. When making 

changes, be careful not to create a resource conflict. 

Sets the handling of DMA resources (DMA channels). 

You can change DMA Resources 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7. 

The default setting is PCI/ISA PnP for each resource. 

PCI/ISA PnP: The target DMA resources are allocated automatically (dynamic allocation) 

by PnP BIOS, as is the case when the Resource Controlled By setting is set to 

Auto (ESCD). 

Legacy ISA: The target IRQ resources are reserved (static allocation) and are not 

affected by the PnP BIOS automatic (dynamic) allocation. When making 

changes, be careful not to create a resource conflict. 

Use this setting to position the Upper Memory Block (UMB) in the expansion memory range. 

Reserved Memory Base 

Sets the position address. The default setting is N/A, indicating that no position is selected. 

The only position address that can be selected is D000. 

Reserved Memory Length 

If a position address is set, select the memory size for that address. 

The default setting is 64K. The only memory size that can be selected is 64K, the same as the 

default setting. 

When a video card is added or when using an MPEG playback card at the same time, the onscreen 

color may not display correctly for a period of time. 

If this occurs, you may be able to fix the problem by changing the setting to Enabled. 



Defaults and Selectable Options 

The BIOS default, setup default, and selectable options of each item are as follows. Some items 

are not displayed and cannot be changed, depending on the settings of their master items. 

Standard CMOS Features 

1) Date, time 

Item Options Notice 

Day of the 

week 

— Day of the week: Automatically determined by the settings of Year, Month, 

and Day. 

Month 

Day 

Jan 

Feb 

Mar 

Apr 

May 

Jun 

Jul 

Aug 

Sep 

Oct 

Nov 

Dec 

1- Last day of the 

current month 

Year, Month, Day: 

Selected from the options. 

Last day of the current month: Either 28, 30, or 31 is automatically determined 

according to the specified month. When the 

year is a leap year, the last day of February will 

automatically be 29. 

Hour, Minute, Second: Selected from the options. 

Year 1999 - 2098 

Hour 0 - 23 

Minute 0 - 59 

Second 0 - 59 

2) IDE Primary master, IDE primary slave, IDE secondary master, IDE secondary slave 


IDE HDD 

Auto- 

Detection 

----- Push the Enter key to execute the auto detection for the device. If the 

connection is made, information obtained from the device, including the 

access method, will be applied. 




IDE Primary 

Master 

IDE Primary 

Slave 

IDE 

Secondary 

Master 

IDE 

Secondary 

Slave 

Access 

Mode 

None 

Auto 


CHS 

LBA 

Large 

Auto 

Set the detection method for the connection device. 

None: The connection detection is not executed. It is treated as 

disconnected software 

Auto: Auto detection is executed. The information held by the device is 

automatically applied. 

Manual: The information set by the user is applied. 

Set the access Method to the connected device. Note that when the device 

detection method is set as “None” it cannot be changed. 

CHS: Access for the device is shortened with “Cylinder Head Sector 

(Addressing) “having 1024 cylinders, 16 heads and 63 sectors. 

LBA: Shortened with the Logical Block Addressing Method, the entire 

memory area is divided into access units and those serial numbers 

are used for accessing. 

Large: This is the access method for extended CHS. When the number of 

CHS cylinders exceeds the normal amount of 1024 cylinders, the 

address is not accessible so the CHS is extended. 

Auto: BIOS determines the optimum method based on the information 

obtained by the device. The LBA method is normally used. 

Capacity ----- This item indicates the memory capacity for the connection device. The 

following differences occur, depending on the device detection method 

used. 

Auto: 

The value calculated according to information obtained by the 

device is displayed. 

Manual: The value calculated according to information specified by the user 

is displayed. 

Cylinder ----- This item indicates the number of cylinders for the connection device. The 


used. 




Head ----- This item indicates the number of heads for the connection device. The 


used. 




Precomp ----- This item indicates the number of write compensation cylinders for the 

connection device. The following differences will occur, depending on the 

device detection method used. 




there is no particular value specified, a maximum value of 65,535 is 

specified) 



Landing 

Zone 

----- This item indicates the head fixed track number for the connection device. 

The following differences will occur, depending on the device detection 

method used. 




there is no particular value specified, the number “1” is specified as 

the maximum number of cylinders). 

Sector ----- This item indicates the number of sectors for the connection device. The 


used. 




3) FDD, display 

The items related to the FDD, display, and error that halt at boot-up are as follows. 

Item Options Fail-Safe default Optimized default 

Drive A 

None 

360KB, 5.25 in. 

1.2MB, 5.25 in. 

720KB, 3.5 in. 

1.44MB, 3.5 in. 

2.88MB, 3.5 in. 

None 

1.44 M, 3.5 in. 

Video 

EGA/VGA 

CGA40 

CGA80 

MONO 

EGA/VGA 

EGA/VGA 

Halt On 

All Errors 

No Errors 

All,But Keyboard 

All,But Diskette 

All,But Disk/Key 





Advanced BIOS Features 

The basic items related to BIOS boot-up are as follows. 


Virus Warning 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

External Cache 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

CPU L2 Cache ECC 

Checking 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Processor Number Feature 

This is a function for specifying 

whether or not to acquire the 

serial number of a CPU model 

added from the Pentium III 

processor. 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Quick Post 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Quick Power On Self Test 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

First Boot Device *1 

Floppy 

LS120 

HDD-0 

SCSI 

CD-ROM 

HDD-1 

HDD-2 

HDD-3 

ZIP100 

LAN 

Disabled 

Floppy 

Floppy 

Second Boot Device *1 

Floppy 

LS120 

HDD-0 

SCSI 

CD-ROM 

HDD-1 

HDD-2 

HDD-3 

ZIP100 

LAN 

Disabled 

HDD-0 

HDD-0 

Third Boot Device *1 

Floppy 

LS120 

HDD-0 

SCSI 

CD-ROM 

HDD-1 

HDD-2 

HDD-3 

ZIP100 

LAN 

Disabled 

SCSI 

SCSI 

Boot Other Device *1 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 



Boot Up Floppy Seek 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Boot Up NumLock Status 

Off 

On 

Off 

Off 

Gate A20 Option 

Normal 

Fast 

Normal 

Fast 

Typematic Rate Setting 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) 

*2 

6 

8 

10 

12 

15 

20 

24 

30 

(6) (6) 

Typematic Delay (Msec) *2 250 

500 

750 

1000 

(250) (250) 

Security Option 

Setup 

System 

Setup 

Setup 

OS Select For DRAM > 64MB 

Non-OS2 

OS2 

Non-OS2 

Non-OS2 

HDD S.M.A.R.T capability 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Report No FDD For WIN95 

No 

Yes 

No 

No 

C8000-CBFFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

CC000-CFFFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

D0000-D3FFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

D4000-D7FFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

D8000-DBFFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

DC000-DFFFF Shadow 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Small Logo (EPA) Show 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Note: 

*1 If bootable SCSI drives (e.g., HDD and CD-ROM) are connected, some products may give priority to such 

SCSI Drives regardless of the First Boot Device, Second Boot Device, Third Boot Device, and Boot Other 

Device settings. This is due to the specifications of the SCSI BIOS (adapters) in question; it is not a malfunction. 

*2. The Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) and Typematic Delay (Msec) items can only be selected if Typematic Rate 

Setting is set as Enabled. 



Advanced Chipset Features 

The setup items related to the chipset are as follows. 


SDRAM CAS Latency Time 3 

2 

3 3 

System BIOS Cacheable 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Video BIOS Cacheable 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

CPU Latency Timer 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Delayed Transaction 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

CAS# Latency 2 

3 

3 3 

Paging Mode Control 

Close 

Open 

Open 

Open 

RAS-to-CAS Override 

by CAS# LT 

Override (2) 

by CAS# LT 

by CAS# LT 

RAS# Timing 

Slow 

Fast 

Fast 

Fast 

RAS# Precharge Timing 

Slow 

Fast 

Fast 

Fast 

Note: 

1. Although each of the default values of SDRAM CAS Latency Time is "3," if a message stating that operations 

can be performed with the setting of "2" appears in POST processing, it is possible to improve performance by 

changing each of the values to "2." 

2. For SDRAM Cycle Time Tras/Trc, SDRAM RAS-to-CAS Delay and SDRAM RAS Precharge Time, the settings of 

both Fail-Safe and Optimized are fixed as "Auto"; they are display only items and cannot be selected. 


Integrated Peripherals 

The setup items related to onboard peripherals are as follows. 


On-Chip Primary PCI IDE 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

On-Chip Secondary PCI 

IDE 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

IDE Primary Master PIO 

Auto 

Mode 0 

Mode 1 

Mode 2 

Mode 3 

Mode 4 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Primary Slave PIO 

Auto 

Mode 0 

Mode 1 

Mode 2 

Mode 3 

Mode 4 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Secondary Master PIO 

Auto 

Mode 0 

Mode 1 

Mode 2 

Mode 3 

Mode 4 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Secondary Slave PIO 

Auto 

Mode 0 

Mode 1 

Mode 2 

Mode 3 

Mode 4 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Primary Master UDMA 

Disabled 

Auto 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Primary Slave UDMA 

Disabled 

Auto 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Secondary Master 

UDMA 

Disabled 

Auto 

Auto 

Auto 

IDE Secondary Slave 

UDMA 

Disabled 

Auto 

Auto 

Auto 

USB Controller 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

USB Keyboard Support 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

USB Mouse Support 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Init Display First 

PCI Slot 

Onboard 

Onboard 

Onboard 

AC97 Audio 

Auto 

Disabled 

Auto 

Auto 




Onboard LAN Device 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

IDE HDD Block Mode 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Onboard Lan Boot ROM 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Onboard FDC Controller 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Onboard Serial Port 1 

3F8/IRQ4 

2F8/IRQ3 

3F8/IRQ4 

3F8/IRQ4 

Onboard Serial Port 2 

3F8/IRQ4 

2F8/IRQ3 

2F8/IRQ3 

2F8/IRQ3 

Onboard Parallel Port 

Disabled 

378/IRQ7 

278/IRQ5 

3BC/IRQ7 

378/IRQ7 

378/IRQ7 

Parallel Port Mode 

ECP 

EPP 

ECP+EPP 

Normal 

Normal 

Normal 

EPP Mode Select 

EPP1.9 

EPP1.7 

(EPP1.9) 

(EPP1.7) 

ECP Mode Use DMA 3 

1 

(3) (3) 

Notes: When the Parallel Port Mode for the EPP Mode Select is set as “EPP” or as “ECP+EPP”, the user can 

then perform the necessary settings. 

When the Parallel Port Mode for the ECP Mode Use DMA is set as “ECP” or as “ECP+EPP”, the user can 

then perform the necessary settings. 


POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP 

The setup items related to power management are as follows. 


Video Off Method 

Blank Screen 

V/H SYNC+Blank 

DPMS 

Blank Screen 

DPMS 

Video off In Suspend 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

MODEM Use IRQ 

NA 

3 

4 

5 

7 

9 

10 

11 

3 NA 

Suspend Mode 

Disabled 

1 Min 

2 Min 

4 Min 

8 Min 

12 Min 

20 Min 

30 Min 

40 Min 

1 Hour 

Disabled 

Disabled 

HDD Power Down 

Disabled 

1 Min 

2 Min 

3 Min 

4 Min 

5 Min 

6 Min 

7 Min 

8 Min 

9 Min 

10 Min 

11 Min 

12 Min 

13 Min 

14 Min 

15 Min 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN 

Instant-Off 

Delay 4 Sec. 

Disabled 

Instant-Off 

Instant-Off 

Wake-Up by PCI card 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Power On by Ring 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Resume by Alarm 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Date (of Month) Alarm 1 - 31 (0) (0) 

Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm hh: 0-23 

mm: 0-59 

ss: 0-59 

(00:00:00) (00:00:00) 

Primary IDE 0 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 




Primary IDE 1 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 


Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 


Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

FDD, COM, LPT Port 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

Enabled 

PCI PIRQ [A-D] 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Notes:If Resume by Alarm for the Date (of Month) Alarm and Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm is set as “Enabled”, the 

user can specify the selection. Directly enter each setting. 

PNP/PCI Configuration 

The setup items related to PCI configurations (Plug and Play) are as follows. 


PNP OS Installed 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Reset Configuration Data 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 

Resource Controlled By 

Auto (ESCD) 


Auto (ESCD) 

Auto (ESCD) 

IRQ Resources 

PCI/ISA PnP 

Legacy ISA 

(PCI/ISA PnP) 

(PCI/ISA PnP) 

DMA Resources 

PCI/ISA PnP 

Legacy ISA 

(PCI/ISA PnP) 

(PCI/ISA PnP) 

Memory Resources 

N/A 

D000-64K 

(N/A) 

(N/A) 

PCI/VGA Palette Snoop 

Disabled 

Enabled 

Disabled 

Disabled 


Notes: When Resources Controlled By is set to Manual, IRQ Resources, DMA Resources, and Memory 

Resources can be set by the user. 

When IRQ Resources is selected, resources PCI/ISA PnP and Legacy ISA can then be selected from the 

advanced settings screen. The IRQ resources that can be set are IRQ-3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. 

When DMA Resources is selected, resources PCI/ISA PnP and Legacy ISA can be set from the advanced 

settings screen. The DMA resources that can be set are DMA-0, 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7. 

When Memory Resource is selected, Reserved Memory Base and Reserved Memory Size can be set from the 

advanced settings screen. 

For Reserved Memory Base, N/A and D000 can be selected from the option settings. 

For Reserved Memory Size, 64K is the only option setting that can be selected. 

Setting a Password 

Select the password setting option (Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password) 

from the main menu, and the following message is displayed in the center of the screen. Type a 

password. The password is case sensitive and made up of up to eight alphanumeric characters. 

ENTER PASSWORD: 

Typing a password clears any previously entered password. After you press Enter, the message 

below is displayed. 

CONFIRM PASSWORD: 

Retype the password you typed. If you do not want to use any password, simply press Enter at 

both prompts. The password will be cleared, and the password function will be disabled. 

If you forget your password, short pins 2 and 3 of jumper JP10 for MR series and turn on the 

power to clear the contents of the CMOS. After clearing the CMOS, be sure to perform the 

following: 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Remove the jumper cap from pins 2 and 3 of jumper JP10 

Execute LOAD Optimized Defaults (from the main menu of the BIOS setup utility) 

Reset BIOS (necessary items) 

To abort the process, press Esc. 

Device Diagnostics Utility 

This program is a utility that enables you to confirm the default operation of the TM printer, 

DM-D, and other POS devices linked to and provided by the system BIOS. 

Startup method 

Press F10 during the POST process, and the message Diagnostics program will execute 

after POST will appear, and the device self-diagnostic utility will start after the POST process. 

Initial screen 



When the device diagnostic utility starts, the following screen appears. 

Use the cursor keys, [Enter] key and [ESC] key to navigate the menus and make selections. 

Cursor keys 

Enter key 

ESC key 

Hot keys 

Use these keys to select and navigate the menus. 

Use this key to select an item. 

Use this key to cancel an operation. 

Use the keys displayed on the menu bar or at other locations on the 

screen in different colors to select the item or function 

corresponding to those keys. 

When the port connected to the TM or DM-D is selected, the connection is confirmed and the 

results are displayed. If the TM or DM-D are not connected, select None. 

Notes: 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

Because this program obtains the serial and parallel port settings from the PnP BIOS, the 

BIOS Setup Utility must be correctly set up. 

When the TM printer and DM-D are connected to the same serial port, make sure the 

communication conditions are the same.The communication conditions are recognized 

automatically when both devices are connected to the same serial port and when the TM 

printer is used by itself. 

If the settings differ from the actual communication conditions of the TM printer and DM-D, 

garbled characters may be printed or displayed as the devices interface with the system. 

The devices can support a communication rate of up to 38,400 bps. 

If the TM printer is connected to a serial port different from that of the DM-D, the tests 

cannot be conducted at the same time.In this situation or when the DM-D is used by itself, 

set the DM-D communications settings to 9600 bps, 8-bits, and with no parity. 

Initialize 


Select Initialize from the menu bar to select the serial port connected to the TM printer and DM- 

D. 

Exit 

Select Exit from the menu bar to exit the program. 

Device Status Display 

Screen image 

After the connection of the TM printer and DM-D is confirmed, the status of those devices is 

displayed. 



TM Status 

The status displayed for TM Status is as shown below. The priority status items are displayed 

from high to low priority. If the device is not recognized, Disable or No communication is 

displayed. 

Displayed Status Status Priority 

Hardware Error A hardware error occurred. High 

Paper feeding 

Receipt end 

Journal end 

Paper near-end 

Receipt near-end 

Journal near-end 

Cover end 

Off-line 

On-line 

The paper is feeding. 

There is no more receipt paper 

There is no more journal paper 

The paper is nearing its end 

The receipt paper is nearing its end 

The journal paper is nearing its end 

The cover is open 

On-line status 

Off-line status 

Low 

DM Status 

The DM Status is displayed as either Ready or Busy. If the device is not recognized, Disable or 

No communication is displayed. 

Drawer Status 

Drawer Status is displayed as either High or Low. 

COM Ports 

LPT1 

Setup 

COM Ports displays the status of the modem signals for each serial port (COM1 to COM4). If not 

allowed, Disable is displayed. 

LPT1 displays the status of the status signal for parallel port LPT1. If not allowed, Disable is 

displayed. 

Select Setup from the menu bar to display a pull-down menu from which the settings can be 

selected. 


Drawer Password 

Select Drawer Password to display the password setting screen. 

Creating a password 

Changing a password 

Enter a case-sensitive password of 4 to 8 English alphanumeric characters. 

You will be asked to enter your password two times when creating a password and three times 

when changing a password. 

Creating a Password 

Changing a Password 

Enter a password in the Enter and Re-Enter fields. 

Enter the current password in the Old field, and then 

enter the new password in the New and Re-Enter fields. 

If nothing is entered in the New field for Changing a Password and the Enter key is then 

pressed, the information is cleared (the setting is canceled). 

If an incorrect password is entered when changing a password, the screen below is displayed 

and the setting becomes invalid. 

Invalid Password 

Press any key to continue 

Drawer ON time 

Select Drawer ON time from the pull-down menu to display the settings screen. 

Sets the Drawer ON time in milliseconds as three digits in base 10 numbers. 

The on time can be set from 0 to 500 milliseconds. 

The set time, however, will be rounded to the smallest unit that can be set for the connected TM. 

The TM-930, for example, will be rounded to 10 milliseconds, and other TM printers will be 

rounded to 2 milliseconds. 

The off time is automatically set to four times that of the on time. 



M/B Information 

Select M/B Information from the pull-down menu to display the main board information. 

The displayed items are as follows. 

CPU 

This displays the CPU name.Example: Intel Celeron (TM) 

Speed This displays the CPU clock.Example: 733 

Memory This displays the system's memory size.Example: 256 

Video 

Sound 

Ethernet 

ROM 

ID 

BIOS Version 

This displays the recognition status of the video controller in the 

chipset.Recognized: Enable Not recognized: Disable 

This displays the recognition status of the sound (audio) controller in 

the chipset.Recognized: Enable Not recognized: Disable 

This displays the recognition status of the network controller in the 

chipset.Recognized: Enable Not recognized: Disable 

This displays the presence of a network boot ROM 

This displays the network controller ID (MAC address) 

This displays the version of the installed BIOS 

Device Test 

Select Setup from the menu bar to display the pull-down menu from which you can select a 

variety of tests 


TM print test 

Select TM print test from the pull-down menu to conduct a print test of the TM printer. 

When the test is successfully completed, "TM print test: done" message appears. 

This test is performed regardless of the status of the modem signal. 

The status of the modem signal is displayed in COM Ports. 

DM display test 

Select DM display test from the pull-down menu to conduct a DM display test. 

When the test is successfully completed, "DM display test: done" message appears. 

This test is performed regardless of the status of the modem signal. 


This test is only performed for the DM-D connected to the serial port. 

Drawer kick-out 

Select Drawer kick-out from the pull-down menu to conduct an open test of the drawer. 

Note: 

Be sure to connect a drawer through a TM or DM. 

This test cannot be performed when the TM Status is displayed as Disable or No connection. This test 

cannot be performed on multiple drawers. 

COM# loop-back 

Select COM# loop-back from the pull-down menu to conduct a communications test using the 

loop-back connector of the serial port. The test results are displayed in the following manner. 

COM# port is disabled 


test:OK 


test:Error 

The designated port is disabled. 

The test was completed successfully 

An error occurred 


COM port 

COM ポート 

1 DCD/power 

2 RxD 

3 TxD 

4 DTR 

5 GND 

6 DSR 

7 RTS 

8 CTS 

9 RI 

loop-back connector 

ループバック・コネクタ 



LPT1 loop-back 

Select LPT1 loop-back from the pull-down menu to conduct a signal wire test using the loopback 

connector of the parallel port. Please note that a test cannot be performed for the data wire. 

The test results are displayed in the following manner. 

LPT1 port is disabled 

LPT1 loop-back test:OK 

LPT1 loop-back 

test:Error 




LPT 

loop-back connector 

1 -STROBE 

2 D0 

3 D1 

4 D2 

5 D3 

6 D4 

7 D5 

8 D6 

9 D7 

10 -ACK 

11 BUSY 

12 PE 

13 SLCT 

14 -AFD 

15 -ERR 

16 -INIT 

17 -SLCTIN 

18 GND 

19 GND 

20 GND 

21 GND 

22 GND 

23 GND 

24 GND 

25 GND 

LPT1 print test 

Select LPT1 print test from the pull-down menu to conduct a print test of the serial port. The test 

results are displayed in the following manner. 

LPT1 port is disabled 

LPT1 print test:OK 

LPT1 print test:Error 






Chapter 6 

Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 


IM-800 Power 

The IM-800 does not have a power switch to shut down the power. When AC power is supplied, 

even if the power is off, a minute electric current flows through the system. The power switch on 

the front turns the system power on or off. 

Force Power Off 

When you want to quit an application and the operating system forcibly, press the power switch 

for more than 4 seconds. Then unplug the power cable. 

LEDs for IM-800 

There are LEDs for POWER, the HDD, the FDD, and the CD-ROM. 

POWER 

LED 

HDD LED 

FDD LED 

CD-ROM 

LED 

These LEDs have the following meanings: 

LED Color Meaning 

POWER Green Power is turned on (during normal operation) 

Flashing green Standby mode 

Off 

Power is off 

HDD Green HDD is being accessed 

CD-ROM Orange CD-ROM is being accessed 

(No LED if CD-ROM drive is not installed) 

FDD Green FDD is being accessed 

LEDs on Back 

There are 2 LEDs on the back of the unit showing the access state to the network using the LAN. 

They are on only when the LAN is being accessed. These LEDs have the following meanings: 


ACT Yellow Accessing the network (Transmitting and receiving) 

100 Green Connected to 100Base-TX 

Rev. I Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 6-1

Opening and Closing of the CD/FDD Cover 

When opening the CD/FDD cover, push down the top of the CD/FDD cover as shown below. 

CD-ROM Emergency Ejection 

When the CD-ROM drive does not function properly, you can remove the CD-ROM by 

following the steps below: 

1. Turn off the IM-800. 

2. Insert a small, thin object, such as an extended paper clip, in the CD-ROM eject hole. 

3. The disk tray pops out slightly; then pull it out gently. 

Adjusting the volume 

Use the sound function adjusting the volume of the speaker by Operation System. 

DM-M820 Power 

The power of the DM-M820 is supplied from the DC12V of the IM-800 or OI-MR01(AC 

Adapter). 

Press the power switch to turn the power on or off. 

6-2 Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 Rev. I


Indicators for DM-M820 

LEDs 

There are two LEDs: the power LED for the LCD unit and the LED for the MSR. 

POWER LED 

MSR LED 

These LEDs have the following meaning: 


Power LED Green Power is on (during normal operation). 

Flashing green No video input signal detected. 

Off 

Power is off. 

MSR* Green Card reading is successful. 

Orange 

Card reading has failed. 

Off 

Waiting for card reading or power is off. 

* Applies only to models with an MSR unit. 

Beep (only for models with an MSR) 

The beeper can be enabled or disabled with the MSR utility. If enabled, the beeper sounds once 

for a successful card reading and three times for an unsuccessful card reading. 

DM-M820 Operation 

Adjusting the View Angle 

The tilt mechanism of the LCD monitor allows you to adjust it to a comfortable viewing angle. 

Rev. I Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 6-3

Hold both sides of the display and adjust the angle as shown below. 

How to Use a Touch Panel (for the Touch Panel Model) 

Be sure to use your finger or a polyacetal pen to input data to the touch panel. 

When the touch panel becomes dirty, wipe its surface lightly with a soft cloth or a cloth 

moistened with ethyl alcohol. 

CAUTION: 

Do not use the unit in locations subject to liquids, since this product is not water resistant. 

How to Read a Magnetic Stripe Card (for the Model with an MSR) 

Slide the card through the slot with the magnetic stripe facing down. 

The MSR can read the data whether the user slides the card from left to right or right to left, as 

shown below. 

Do not stop sliding the card during the reading of data. This may cause a read error. 

Do not use the keyboard while the MSR is reading a card. 

When magnetic card data has a header or footer, make the proper settings with the MSR utility. 

6-4 Operation of the IM-800 and the DM-M820 Rev. I


Chapter 7 

Maintenance and Adjustment 

Cleaning the IM-800 Front Panel Ventilation Opening 

There are many small holes in the left of the front panel. Air enters here and goes out the 

ventilation openings on the rear side and right side. If these holes become clogged with dust, 

remove the dust with a small vacuum cleaner or other appropriate cleaning device. 

Display Adjustment for DM-M820 

The display adjustment procedure for the DM-M820 depends on when the unit was 

manufactured. 

Determining which procedure to use 

Check the label on the manufacture's plate at the base of the DM-M820. 

SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx* :Display Adjustment (See page 7-2) 

Later SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx* :Display Adjustment (See page 7-4) 

Rev. I Maintenance and Adjustment 7-1

Display Adjustment (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) 

To adjust the LCD display, use the Function and 

Adjustment control buttons on the right side of the LCD 

unit. 

When you press the top Function control button (↑) 

once, the On-Screen Display appears in the lower righthand 

corner of the screen. 

Function control 

buttons 

To select a function in the On-Screen Display, use the ↑ and ↓ Function control buttons, as 

shown in the table below. To adjust the selected function, press the + or – Adjustment control 

buttons. For example, to adjust the horizontal position of the display image, press the ↑ button 

twice and the ↓ button 3 times. Then adjust the image using the + and – buttons. 

All settings made using the On-Screen Display are maintained even if the LCD is turned off. 

Number of times to press the 

Function buttons 

Setting items 

Function 

↑ button 

1 

Basic Setting 

↓ button 

0 CONTRAST To adjust the contrast level of the display. 

1 BRIGHTNESS To adjust the brightness level of the 

backlight. 

2 

POSITION 

0 AUTO ADJUST To automatically adjust the picture quality 

and alignment. 

1 PHASE To adjust the screen display for focus and 

clarity. 

2 CLOCK To adjust the display pixel alignment. 

3 H-POSITION To adjust the display position horizontally. 

4 V-POSITION To adjust the display position vertically. 

5 GRAPH/TEXT To select either Graphics or Text. 

6 RESET To set the function parameters in the 

position menu to the default values. 

7-2 Maintenance and Adjustment Rev. I


Number of times to press the 

Function buttons 

Setting items 

Function 

↑ button 

3 

Miscellaneous 

Menu 

↓ button 

0 On-Screen 

Display 

H-POSITION 

1 On-Screen 

Display 

V-POSITION 

To adjust the horizontal position of the 

On-Screen Display menu. 

To adjust the vertical position of the 

On-Screen Display menu. 

2 MENU TIMER To select the On-Screen Display menu 

display time. 

3 INFORMATION To display the information for the LCD. 

4 LANGUAGE To set different languages for the On- 

Screen Display menu. 

5 RESET To set the function parameters in the 

miscellaneous menu to the default values. 

4 

COLOR TEMP. 

Menu 

0 COLOR USER 

(PALETTE) 

1 COLOR USER 

(GREEN) 

To select the color palette. 

To adjust the density level of GREEN. 

2 COLOR USER 

(RED) 

To adjust the density level of RED. 

3 COLOR USER 

(BLUE) 

To adjust the density level of BLUE. 

When the monitor is on and no video signal is received, 

this message is displayed. 


Display Adjustment (SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) 

To adjust the LCD display, use the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu. To adjust the OSD menu 

with the Function buttons, use the Adjustment buttons and Power button. 

FUNCTION button 

ADJUSTMENT button 

POWER button 

❏ 

Displaying and closing the OSD menu 

To display the On-Screen Display menu, press the 

(↑) Function button once. 

To close the OSD menu, press the POWER button 

once. 

Main menu 

Sub menu 

❏ 

Changing the language 

To select "Misc-Control" in the Main menu, press the (↑) or (↓) FUNCTION button. To select the 

Sub menu, press the (+) ADJUSTMENT button once. To select Language, press the (↑) or (↓) 

FUNCTION button in the Sub menu. To select the language you want, press the (+) or (-) 

ADJUSTMENT button. The available languages are English, German, French, Spanish, Italian 

and Japanese. To close the OSD menu, press the POWER button twice. 

❏ 

Selecting the main menu 

To select a function in the Main menu, press the (↑) or (↓) Function button. 

❏ 

Selecting a function in the Sub menu 

To select a function in the Sub menu, press the + Adjustment button once. To adjust the selected 

function in the Sub menu, press the (↑) or (↓) Function button.To return from the Sub menu to 

the Main menu, press the Power button once. 

❏ 

Setting 

To make settings of a function in the Sub menu, press the (+) or (-) ADJUSTMENT button. All 

settings made using the OSD are maintained even if the LCD is turned off. The table below 

shows each adjustment item. 



If you press the (↓) Function button once when the OSD 

menu is not displayed, the message shown on the right 

appears and the LCD is adjusted automatically. 

When the power of the DM-M820 is on and there is no 

video signal, the message shown on the right appears for a 

few seconds, and then the Power LED flashes. 

When signals that the DM-M820 cannot display are 

received, the message shown on the right appears. 

All settings made using the On-Screen Display are maintained even if the LCD is turned off 

Main menu Sub manu Function 

Basic Setting AUTO ADJUST To automatically adjust the picture 

quality and alignment. 

H-POSITION 

To adjust the display position 

horizontally. 

V-POSITION 

To adjust the display position vertically. 

PHASE 

To adjust the screen display for focus 

and clarity. 

CLOCK 

To adjust the display pixel alignment. 

RESET 

To set the function parameters in the 

miscellaneous menu to the default 

values. 

GRAPH/TEXT 

To select either Graphics or Text. 


Main menu Sub manu Function 

OSD Menu 

Setting 

OSD Display H-POSITION 

To adjust the horizontal position of the 

OSD menu. 

OSD V-POSITION 

To adjust the vertical position of the 

OSD menu. 

OSD MENU TIMER 

To select the OSD menu display time. 

COLOR TEMP. 

Menu 

CONTRAST 

To adjust the contrast level of the 

display. 

BRIGHTNESS 

To adjust the brightness level of the 

backlight. 

COLOR USER 

To select the color palette. 

ADJUST COLOR GREEN 

To adjust the density level of GREEN. 

ADJUST COLOR RED 

To adjust the density level of RED. 

ADJUST COLOR BLUE 

To adjust the density level of BLUE. 

AUTO ADJUST COLOR 

To auto adjust color 

Miscellaneous 

Menu 

OSD LANGUAGE 

To set different languages for the OSD 

menu. 

INFORMATION 

To display the information for the LCD. 



Touch Panel Calibration 

Touch panel calibration adjusts settings to make the position the operator touches on the touch 

panel match the computer-recognized software position. 

Calibrate the touch panel in the following situations. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

When the LCD unit is replaced. 

When you want to fine-tune the touch points on the touch panel. 

When the touch point positions on the touch panel are not accurate. 

The procedure for calibrating the touch panel differs according to the Operating System you are 

using. Follow the appropriate procedure for your system below. 

Windows 

MS-DOS 


2. Select in order: Start - Programs - Touch - Touchscreen Control. The touch 

screen control window is displayed. 

3. Touch the Calibrate button to display the calibration screen. 

4. Follow the messages on the screen, which will instruct you to touch points on the x 

character. 

5. After the test finishes, a dialog box appears. Touch the OK button. The touch screen control 

window reappears. 

6. Touch the Exit button. Calibration is complete. 

Make sure the touch panel driver is installed. The touch panel driver is on the Driver CD-ROM 

included with the DM-M820. 

1. Type TBCAL and press Enter on the keyboard. The calibration utility starts, and the main 

menu is displayed. 

2. On the main menu screen, type H on the keyboard. The calibration screen appears. The letter 

L is displayed from the bottom left to the upper right of the screen. Touch points on the two 

edges of the letter L. 

3. When the test is finished, a message is displayed. Press the option key on the keyboard. 

You return to the main menu of the calibration screen. Type the letter x on the keyboard to exit 

the calibration utility. Calibration is complete. 


Maintenance for AC Adapter 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

To clean the unit, wipe with a dry or slightly moistened (and firmly wrung out) cloth. 

Never clean the unit while it is plugged into the wall outlet. 

Do not clean the unit with thinner, benzine, or alcohol. 



Chapter 8 


Flow of Troubleshooting Procedures 

Confirm and prepare in advance 

Check these standard items prior to 

beginning troubleshooting. (See page 8-2.) 

Breakdown of likely locations for each 

type of fault 

Check the detailed breakdown of causes of 

faults for individual units and components. 

(See page 8-2.) 

In addition to the flowchart shown above, you can use the Power On Self-Test (POST) messages 

to identify the causes of faults. For a description of the POST messages, refer to page 8-20. 

This chapter uses icons to represent the system configuration patterns below. 

• IM-800 + DM-M820 

• IM-800 + CRT 

• PC + DM-M820 

The explanation in this chapter beside either of the icons shown below relates to that hardware. 

Whenever the icon shown indicates the hardware in your system, check the accompanying 

explanation for solutions to your problem first. If the icon is located above the problem 

description, see the entire explanation for the problem. If the icon is located inside the 

explanation, you need not to read the explanation before the portion indicated with the icon. 

IM-800 

DM-M820 

Rev. I Troubleshooting 8-1

Preparations for Troubleshooting 

Before troubleshooting, check and, if necessary, correct the following points. 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

❏ 

When the IM-800 is used in your system, you can check for the causes of faults is in the 

IM-800 or peripherals by using the device diagnostics. 

Is the power voltage in the AC outlet normal? 

Are the peripherals turned on? (The EPSON customer display has its own power switch.) 

Are the CPU, DIMM(s), and HDD EPSON-approved products? (EPSON guarantees the 

operation of the CPU, DIMM(s), and HDD(s) assembled in the IM-800 prior to shipment to 

the customer. For warranty-exchange purposes, EPSON guarantees only CPU, DIMM(s), 

and HDDs purchased from EPSON.) 

The customer is responsible for products connected to the interfaces below. Confirm that the 

products fit the specifications and functions that EPSON recommends. 

• Keyboard/mouse port 

• Serial port 

• Parallel port 

• Ethernet port 

• USB port 

• PCI slot 

❏ Are the OS and drivers installed correctly? (For installation methods, refer to Chapter 4.) 

Problems and Possible Causes 

The problems are indicated below. 

System unable to start 

Power management faults 

System clock faults 

Memory faults 

Floppy disk drive unit faults 

HDD faults 

CD-ROM faults 

Network faults 

LCD display faults 

Touch panel faults 

8-2 Troubleshooting Rev. I


MSR faults *1) 

Printer unit faults 

Serial port, parallel port, USB port, and keyboard / mouse port faults 

Power supply faults 

Faults that are difficult to diagnose 

System Unable to Start 

Power Supply Remains Off (Green Indicator Off (*)) and Display Screen is Blank 

❏ 

Follow the procedures below. 

1. Unplug the power cable. Leave it unplugged for about fifteen minutes; then plug it back 

in and try to start it again. 

2. Confirm whether the problem solves when replacing peripheral devices and turning on 

the power supply. 

3. If this does not solve the problem, there may be a faulty connection or malfunction in 

one of the system’s units. 

4. Test the power supply. (Refer to page 8-23.) 

5. Replace the power switch assembly. 

6. If the power supply is normal, refer to the section, “Possible Short in System,” on 

page 8-17. 

7. If the preceding steps fail to reveal the source of the problem, replace the main circuit 

board and test if it is the solution. 

(*): Note: The green indicator is a feature of the IM-800. 

Error Beep Indicating a Fault Sounds During Start-up 

❏ 

If an error beep indicating a fault sounds during start-up, follow the procedures below. 

1. When you hear one long beep (*), the cause may be a memory problem. See “Memory 

Error,” on page 8-7. 

2. One long beep followed by two short beeps indicates a video error. Refer to the “Beep” 

column in the section “POST Messages” on page 8-20. 

(*): Note that a short beep sounds during normal system start up; this does not indicate an error. 

Power Supply Indicator Comes on but the Display Screen Remains Blank 

❏ 

If the short beep indicating normal start-up does not sound, follow the procedures below. 

1. Check the video cable connections. (Check the cable for the DC outlet and video outlet.) 

2. Confirm whether the power for the display is ON. 


3. Replace the display unit. 

4. If the problem is solved in step 3, the display unit has failed. See the problems described 

under “LCD Display Faults“ on page 8-11 to troubleshoot the display itself. 

5. Confirm whether replacing the main circuit board solves the problem. 

Display Indicator Comes On, POST Ends Normally, but System Does Not Boot from Hard Disk 

Drive 

❏ 


1. Confirm that any floppy disk is pulled out of the FDD drive. 

2. Check whether the problem is solved by replacing the HDD with another HDD that has 

an operating system installed. 

• If the replacement drive starts up normally, it indicates that there is a problem with 

the customer's HDD itself or the data configuration of the HDD. 

• If the system fails to start from the replacement HDD, use the following checks and 

recovery measures. 

3. Use the BIOS setup utility to check the customer’s BIOS settings. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

• Confirm whether the HDD is selected as the boot device in the setting for 

Advanced BIOS Features. 

4. Run the Load Optimized Defaults command in the BIOS setup utility. (Refer to 

Chapter 5.) 

5. Set the IDE Primary Master option in the Standard CMOS Feathers menu of the 

BIOS setup utility to Auto. 

❏ 

Check to see if the system can now start from the replacement HDD. If the system starts, 

check the customer’s BIOS settings for any errors. If the system doesn’t start, the cause may 

be a faulty connection or a problem with an individual unit or the connector itself. Follow 

the procedures below. 

1. Confirm whether replacing the HDD cable solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the power supply solves the problem. 


Computer does not Boot the Operating System (OS). 

❏ 


1. Are the OS and driver installed correctly? (For installation method, refer to Chapter 4.) 

2. If using the DM-M820 with Windows 2000, the MSR must not connect to the mouse port. 



❏ 

Check whether the system can now start from the replacement HDD. If the system starts, 

check the customer’s BIOS settings for any errors. If the system doesn’t start, the cause may 



1. Confirm whether replacing the HDD cable solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the power supply solves the problem. 


Display Indicator Comes On, POST Ends Normally, but System Does Not Start from Floppy Disk 

Drive 

❏ 


1. Confirm that the system start-up files are installed onto the floppy disk to boot. 

2. Confirm that the Advanced BIOS Features / First Boot Device item in the 

BIOS setup utility is set to Floppy. 

3. Enter the BIOS setup utility and display the customer’s BIOS settings. (See Chapter 5.) 

4. Set the Drive A option in the Standard CMOS Features menu of the BIOS setup 

utility to 1.44 M, 3.5 in. 


Chapter 5.) 

❏ 

Check whether the system can now start from the floppy disk drive. If the system starts, 

check the customer's BIOS settings for any errors. If the system doesn't start, the cause may 

be a faulty connection or a problem with an individual unit and connector itself. Follow the 

procedures below. 

1. Check the connectors. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the FDD cable or FFC cable solves the problem. 

3. Confirm whether replacing the FDD circuit board solves the problem. 

4. Confirm whether replacing the FDD solves the problem. 



Power Management Faults 

Unable to Turn On System from USB Device 

Note that system power supply control using USB devices is not supported. 

Unable to Turn On System from Network 

❏ 

Confirm that Wakeup by PCI card in the Power Management Setup is set to 

Enabled. 

• The measures described below assume there are no problems with customer network 

settings and the programs that control this function. 

• Note that power cannot be turned on from the network if the system has previously 

been turned off by pressing the power switch for a period of 4 or more seconds. In this 

case, restart the system using the power switch; then turn the power supply off from a 

software application or from Windows. 

• The Onboard LAN Device setting in the Integrated Peripherals menu in the 

BIOS setup utility must be set to Enabled. Note that the factory default for this setting is 

Enabled. When you use not only the power management but also access the network, it 

must be set to Enabled. 

System Does Not Wake Up from Standby Mode When Touch Panel is Pressed 

❏ 

The system is designed to wake up from the standby mode in response to keyboard and 

PS/2 operation, regardless of BIOS settings. (This does not apply in the case of the USB 

Keyboard configuration.) 

Operating System Standby Mode Does Not Function 

❏ 

Confirm whether the customer is using the Windows NT operating system. 

• The standby mode is not supported under Windows NT. 

PS/2 mouse does not work after resuming from Suspend Mode. 

❏ 

Confirm whether the customer is using the correct Windows 98 BIOS (version 2.08 or later). 

• The customer must use Windows 98 BIOS version 2.06 or later. 

System Clock Faults 

System Time Deviates, Even After Being Set Correctly 

❏ 

❏ 

If using Windows NT, the Suspend mode setting must not have been set. A design 

characteristic of Windows NT is that the time deviates when the system enters the standby 

mode. 

Confirm whether replacing the main circuit board solves the problem. 



Time Setting is Not Possible or Time Setting Disappears 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether replacing the lithium battery on the main circuit board solves the 

problem. 


“CMOS Checksum Error” occurs frequently during the POST 

❏ 

When the lithium battery is depleted, this error occurs. If the battery is not changed, CMOS 

RAM may be cleared or the RTC is cleared every time the power of IM-800 is turned off. 

Replace the battery with the commercially sold lithium battery type CR2032. 

Memory Faults 

Memory Count Displayed by POST Differs from Actual Memory Size 

❏ 


1. Replace the DIMM(s). 

2. Confirm whether replacing the DIMM(s) solves the problem. 

• Note that EPSON guarantees only DIMM products that EPSON recommends. 

3. Confirm whether replacing main circuit board solves the problem. 

Memory Error 

❏ 


1. Check DIMM installation. 

2. Replace the DIMM(s). 

3. Confirm whether replacing the DIMM(s) solves the problem. 

• Note that EPSON guarantees only DIMM products that EPSON recommends. 

4. Check CPU installation. 

5. Confirm whether replacing the CPU solves the problem. 



Floppy Disk Drive Unit Faults 

Unable to Read from or Write to Floppy Disk 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether using another floppy disk solves the problem. 

2. Confirm that the setting of Drive A in Standard CMOS Features of BIOS is set to 

1.44MB, 3.5 in. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

❏ 

Check whether the floppy drive is able to read or write. If the floppy disk drive is still unable 

to read or write, the cause may be a faulty connection or a problem with an individual unit 

or the connector itself. Follow the procedures below. 

1. Confirm that the FDD connections are secure. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the FDD cable or FFC cable solves the problem. 

3. Confirm whether replacing the FDD circuit board solves the problem. 

4. Confirm whether replacing the FDD solves the problem. 


HDD Faults 

Unable to Read Data from HDD 

❏ 


1. Confirm the setting of the First/Second/Third Boot Device option in the Advanced BIOS 

Features item in the BIOS setup utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

2. Confirm the setting of the IDE Primary/Secondaly Master/Slave option in the Standard 

CMOS Features item in the BIOS setup utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

3. Check the connection of the HDD cable. 

4. In case of the 2HDD model, confirm the setting of the jumper. Confirm one is set the Master, 

and another is set the Slave. (Refer to Appendix-A) 

5. When there is the other HDD which can do Boot, attempt exchanging. 


Can Boot from Hard Disk Drive but Read/Write Errors Occur 

❏ 


1. Check the connection of the HDD cable. 



2. Confirm whether replacing the HDD solves the problem. 


CD-ROM Faults 

Unable to Read Data from CD-ROM 

❏ 


1. Check the surface of the disk for foreign matter, marks, and scratches. 

2. Note that labels applied to the CD-ROM can cause data read errors. 

3. If using DOS for the system, you need to use the specified driver. (For installation the 

driver, refer to “Installing the CD-ROM driver“ in Chapter 4.) 

4. Use the BIOS setup utility to check the customer’s BIOS settings. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 


Chapter 5.) 

6. A CD-ROM is attached to the HDD connector. Confirm the setting of the IDE 

Primary, Secondary option in the Standard CMOS Features menu of the BIOS 

setup utility. 

❏ 

Check whether the system can now read data from the CD-ROM drive. If data can be read, 

check the customer’s BIOS settings for any errors. If the data cannot be read, the cause may 

be a faulty connection or a problem with the individual unit or the connector itself. Follow 


1. Confirm whether replacing the CD-ROM cable solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the CD-ROM solves the problem. 


Can Read But Unable to Boot from CD-ROM 

❏ 


1. Confirm that the CD-ROM disc contains the system files. 

2. Confirm the setting of the First/Second/Third Boot Device option in the 

Advanced BIOS Features item in the BIOS setup utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

CD-ROM Drive Tray Doesn’t Open 

❏ 


1. Make sure the power supply for the IM-800 is turned on. Pressing the EJECT button will 

not open the CD-ROM drive tray when the power is turned off. 


• The CD-ROM drive tray can be opened by inserting the designated tool in the EJECT 

hole. 

2. If using DOS for the system, use the specified driver. (To install the driver, refer to 

“Installing the CD-ROM driver“ in Chapter 4.) 

3. Confirm whether replacing the CD-ROM solves the problem. 

Network Faults 

Unable to Connect to Network 

❏ 


1. Check the network cable connections. 

2. Confirm that network settings like protocol, IP address, communication speed, and so 

on have been selected correctly. 

3. Confirm that the correct network driver has been selected. (If the network driver is not 

installed on the system, install the network driver.) 

4. The Onboard LAN Device setting in the Integrated Peripherals menu in the 

BIOS setup utility must be set to Enabled. 

❏ 

If the network is still not able to connect, the cause may be a faulty connection or a problem 

with an individual unit or the connector itself. Follow the procedures below. 


Unable to Switch Transmission Speed 

❏ 


1. Confirm that network settings like protocol, IP address, communication speed, and so 

on are specified correctly. 

2. Confirm that the correct network driver has been selected. (If the network driver is not 

installed the system, install the network driver.) 

❏ 

If the transmission speed still cannot be switched, the cause may be a faulty connection or a 

problem with an individual unit and the connector itself. Follow the procedures below. 




Speaker Faults 

Sound does not sound 

Adjust the sound in OS. First, confirm the setting of OS. 

❏ 


1. In case of the Speaker model, exchange the speaker. 


LCD Display Faults 

LCD Display Screen Either Blank or Unstable 

❏ 


1. Check the connection of the video connector. 

2. Check the display setting of the display. (Refer to Chapter 7.) 

3. Replace the display and cable (Reference No. 119). 

4. Confirm whether replacing the LCD circuit board solves the problem. 

5. Confirm whether replacing the LCD solves the problem. 

6. Confirm whether replacing the AC adapter solves the problem. 

7. Check the power supply. (Refer to page 8-23.) 


Backlight of LCD Does Not Function 

❏ 


1. Check the connection of the inverter board. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the inverter board solves the problem. 




LCD Display Screen Too Dark, Too Bright or Cannot Be Adjusted 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether adjusting the brightness level on the LCD solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the switch cable assembly solves the problem. 


4. Confirm whether replacing the inverter board solves the problem. 


Other Display Problems 

❏ 

If any of the following problems occur, check the monitor signal connection/cable, monitor, 

and system board. 

• Incorrect colors. 

• No high intensity. 

• Missing, broken, or incorrect characters. 

• Destroyed image. 

• Unreadable monitor. 

Touch Panel Faults 

Note: 

If the keyboard or mouse does not function, refer to the problems described in the section titled 

“System Unable to Start” on page 8-3. 

Touch Panel Does Not Function 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether the touch panel is connected to the COM1 or COM2. 

• You must confirm whether to use the COM1 or COM2 for the touch panel. 

2. Check the external connectors. 

3. Check the touch panel driver settings. For example, check the IRQ and I/O address for 

each port. 

4. Confirm whether calibrating the touch panel solves the problem. (Refer to Chapter 7.) 

5. Reinstall the touch panel driver after uninstalling it. 



❏ 

Check whether the touch panel can now function. If the touch panel can function, check the 

customer’s touch panel settings for any errors. If the touch panel cannot function, the cause 

may be a faulty connection or a problem with the individual unit or the connector itself. 


1. Confirm whether replacing the touch panel unit circuit board solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the touch panel unit solves the problem. 


Note: 

You can confirm whether the touch panel circuit board operates correctly by checking the LEDs (red 

and green) on the touch panel circuit board. 

Red LED Green LED Possible cause 

On Flashing Operating normally. 

On Off Possible failure of touch panel controller. 

Off On — 

Off Off Power is not supplied to the DM-M820. 

If the power is supplied to the DM-M820, the fuse on the 

touch panel circuit board or LCD circuit board may 

burned out. 

Touch Panel Unable to Respond Correctly to Commands 

❏ 


1. Check the touch panel driver settings. (Refer to Chapter 4.) 

Note: 

When you set up Windows 2000 / XP, perform the double-click settings during installation of the 

driver. Refer to Chapter 4.) 

2. Confirm whether calibrating the touch panel solves the problem. (Refer to Chapter 7.) 

3. Reinstall the touch panel driver after uninstalling it. 

❏ 

Check whether the touch panel can now function. If the touch panel can function, check the 

customer’s touch panel settings for any errors. If the touch panel cannot function, the cause 

may be a faulty connection or a problem with the individual unit or the connector itself. 


1. Confirm whether replacing the touch panel unit circuit board solves the problem. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the touch panel unit (1057) solves the problem. 



Printer Unit Faults 

The power supply of the printer isn't turned on 

❏ 


1. Check the power switch of the TM printer is turned on. 

2. Check the power cable of the TM printer is connected with the TM printer. 

3. Check the TM printer is connected to the power supply of the TM-800 or the 

outlet.When supplying the power from the IM-800 TM printer power supply built-in 

model, check the power cable connections. 

4. When supplying the power from the IM-800 TM printer power supply built-in model, 

confirm whether supplying the other power supply such as the AC adapter solves the 

problem. 

5. Confirm whether replacing the TM printer solves the problem. 

6. When supplying the power from the IM-800 TM printer power supply built-in model, 

confirm whether replacing the power supply unit solves the problem. (See page 3-44) 

Abnormal Operation 

❏ 


1. Check the TM printer unit connections. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the printer unit solves the problem. 

• Check the communication using the device diagnostics utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 


Printer Unit Does Not Print Normally 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether the power supply of the printer is connected. 

2. Check the printer unit connections. 

3. Confirm that the correct data transmission parameters have been entered. 

• Check the communication with the device diagnostics utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

4. The data control flow procedures differs according to the type of software program 

being used. (For example, Windows UniMini and Advanced Printer Driver only support 

XON/XOFF control, while OPOS supports DTR/DSR control.) 



❏ 

If the printer unit is still not able to print, the cause may be a faulty connection or a problem 

with an individual unit or the connector itself. Follow the procedures below. 

1. Confirm whether replacing the printer unit solves the problem. 

2. Refer to the relevant technical manuals and service manuals for the printer in question. 

Deterioration in Print Quality 

❏ 

Refer to the relevant technical manuals and service manuals for the printer in question. 

Serial Port, Parallel Port, USB Port, and Keyboard/Mouse Port Faults 

Connected Device Fails to Operate 

❏ 


1. Confirm that the peripheral device connections are correct. 

2. Confirm whether the power for the peripheral devices is on. 

• The power for the USB bus can supply 500mA per port. Confirm how much current 

should be necessary for each USB device. 

3. Confirm the BIOS setting. 

4. For problems with the USB device, confirm that the setting of the USB Controller in 

the Integrated Peripherals Menu is set to Enabled. 

• USB devices are supported only in Windows 98/2000/XP. The USB keyboard and 

USB mouse are also supported in Windows NT and DOS. 

• You need to confirm whether the USB Keyboard/Mouse Support in the BIOS is set 

to Disabled, because there is a possibility for the system to cause a keyboard fault if 

the system includes a DM-M820 with a MSR. 

5. Confirm that the driver for COM3 or 4 is installed. (If the driver is not installed, install 

the driver.) 

❏ 

Check whether the device is able to operate. If the device still fails to operate, the cause may 



1. Replace the various devices one at a time and operate the system to determine the source 

of the fault. 

• Perform an operational check for the devices connected to the IM-800 by using the 

device diagnostics utility. (Refer to Chapter 5.) 

2. For problems with the front USB port, confirm whether replacing the USB cable solves 

the problem. 

3. Replace the cable (Reference No. 119) for the DM-M820. 

4. For problems with the keyboard, replace the DM-M820. 


5. For problems with the keyboard, confirm whether replacing the MSR assembly solves 

the problem. 

6. For problems with the COM3 port, confirm whether replacing the COM cable solves the 

problem. 

7. For problems with the COM3 or COM4 port, confirm whether replacing the COM port 

circuit board solves the problem. 

8. For problems with the COM3 or COM4 port, confirm whether replacing the riser circuit 

board solves the problem. 


Faults that are Difficult to Diagnose 

System Halts on an Intermittent Basis 

❏ 


1. Visually confirm that the CPU cooling fan is functioning properly at normal speed. If it 

stops, confirm whether replacing the CPU fan solves the problem. 

2. Visually confirm that the system fan is functioning properly at normal speed. If it stops, 

confirm whether replacing the system fan solves the problem. 

3. Visually confirm that the power supply fan is functioning properly at normal speed. If it 

stops, confirm whether replacing the power supply unit solves the problem. 

4. Check whether the CPU and DIMM(s) are properly installed. 

5. Check the connectors for the HDD, CD-ROM, and FDD. 

6. Check the other internal connectors for the IM-800. 




Possible Short in System 

❏ 


Note: 

In cases where the power supply short circuit protection shuts the power supply down, power will not 

come back on if the power is turned on immediately after being turned off. It is necessary to wait for a 

period of at least fifteen seconds before turning the power back on. 

Step 

Corrective Procedure 

1 Remove all the devices listed below. 

• All peripheral devices connected to IM-800 interface board. 

• PCI card inserted in PCI slot. 

2 Turn on the IM-800 and confirm power is being supplied. If it is, reinstall the removed devices one 

at a time, while confirming power supply status. 

3 If the power described in step 2 is not being supplied, remove the following devices (while step 1 

devices are still detached). 

• HDD 

• CD-ROM 

• FDD 

4 Turn on the IM-800 and confirm power is being supplied. If it is, reinstall the removed devices one 

at a time while confirming power supply status. 

5 If no power is supplied in step 4, replace all circuit boards and cable assemblies one by one with 

items that are known to operate normally from the state when all devices are removed in step 3, 

and check whether power is supplied. 

Power Supply Faults 

Power Supply Fails 

❏ 


1. Visually check that the power supply fan is functioning at normal speed. 

2. Check cable connectors of the power supply, and the internal connectors of the IM-800. 

3. Proceed to the section, “Procedures for Testing the Power Supply,” on page 8-23, and 

test the power supply. 


4. Confirm that the power consumption for the PCI slots, COM ports, keyboard/mouse 

port, and USB port conform to the specifications in the table below. 

Power supply Application Capacity 

+ 5 VDC PCI slot, COM ports, keyboard/mouse, USB 2.0 A 

+ 3.3 VDC PCI slot 1.0 A 

+ 12 VDC PCI slot, COM ports 1.0 A 

– 12 VDC PCI slot 0.02 A 

+24 VDC TM printer 2 A 

The individual ports possess the capacity limits in the table below. 

Port Power supply Supply capacity Stipulations 

COM port + 5 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1A/100 

ms) 

+ 12 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1A/100 

ms) 

USB port + 5 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1A/ 

100ms) 

Keyboard and mouse + 5 VDC 500 mA each (peak 1A/ 

100ms) 

Total current and + 5 VDC 

and + 12 VDC must not 

exceed the value shown at 

left. 

— 

— 

5. Test using the procedures described in the section, “Possible Short in System,” on page 

8-17. 

6. Test using the procedures described in the section, “System Halts on Intermittent Basis,” 

on page 8-16. 

Unable to Switch Off Power Supply 

❏ 


1. Confirm whether the power supply switches off after the power switch is pressed for a 

period of 4 or more seconds. 

2. Confirm whether replacing the switch cable assembly solves the problem. 

3. Proceed to section, “Procedures for Testing the Power Supply,” on page 8-23, and test 





MSR Faults 

Unable to Read Cards 

❏ 


1. Check whether an incompatible card type (track type) is used. 

2. Check the reading face of the card. 

Note: 

Confirm whether the problem is resolved by removing the external connectors. The MSR and 

keyboard can not be used at the same time. 

3. Confirm whether moving the display away from such noise sources as CRT displays and 

power supplies solves the problem. 

4. Confirm the cable (Reference No. 119) connection at the divided side. 

5. Confirm that the correct settings have been entered in the MSR setup utility. (Refer to 

Chapter 4.) 

6. Check the cable (Reference No. 119) connection at the side that is connected to the DM- 

M820. 

7. Confirm whether replacing the MSR assembly solves the problem. 



POST Messages 

The Power On Self-Test (POST) checks the system configuration and hardware when power is 

turned on. If it detects any errors, it issues error messages and emits audible beeps. The 

following section explains the error messages. 

POST Messages 

During the POST, the BIOS either sounds a beep code or displays a message when it detects a 

correctable error. The following is a list of POST messages. An error message may be followed 

by a prompt to press F1 to continue or press DEL to enter setup. 

POST messages 

Message 

BEEP 

BIOS ROM CHECKSUM 

ERROR — SYSTEM HALTED. 

CMOS BATTERY HAS FAILED 

CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR 

DISK BOOT FAILURE, INSERT 

SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS 

ENTER 

DISKETTE DRIVES OR TYPES 

MISMATCH ERROR — RUN 

SETUP 

DISPLAY SWITCH IS SET 

INCORRECTLY 

Description 

There are two kinds of beep in BIOS. 

This code indicates that a video error has occurred and the BIOS cannot initialize the 

video screen to display any additional information. This beep code consists of a single 

long beep followed by two short beeps. 

The other code indicates that memory error has occurred. This beep code consists of a 

single long beep repeatedly. 

This message is displayed when the checksums of the BIOS ROM (F0000h to FFFFFh) do 

not match. 

Update the BIOS. 

If the same error still occurs after updating the BIOS, there may be a malfunction of the 

system ROM or main board. Try replacing these parts in turn to see if this solves the 

problem. 

This message is displayed when a problem occurs with the CMOS backup battery. 

Replace the backup battery. 

If the error message is still displayed after replacing the battery, there may be a 

malfunction of the CMOS peripheral circuitry (including the chipset). Try replacing the 

main board to see if this solves the problem. 

This message is displayed when the CMOS checksum and values do not match, such as 

during a CMOS error when rewriting the BIOS or after long-term storage. 

Execute Load Optimized Defaults in the BIOS setup utility to set the default settings and 

make any necessary changes to the settings to see if this solves the problem. 

This message is displayed when a start-up drive cannot be found after attempting a 

start-up in the order of First Boot Device, Second Boot Device, Third Boot Device, and 

Boot Other Device. 

Try inserting a floppy disk, CD-ROM, or other removable disk into the corresponding drive, 

or try reconnecting a start-up device and then restart the system. 

If, after implementing these solutions, the system still does not start up, there may be a 

malfunction of the main board, interface cable, or the drive itself. Try replacing these 

parts in turn to see if this solves the problem. 

This message is displayed when the BIOS drive settings differ from the actual installed 

devices. 

Check to see if there is an error in the settings of the BIOS setup utility or an error in the 

device connected. 

If no problems were found, try replacing the main board or the drive in question to see if 

this solves the problem. 

DISPLAY TYPE HAS CHANGED SINCE LAST BOOT 

These messages are not displayed on standard models. 

If these messages are displayed, the system BIOS may be damaged or a function may 

be extended by an application or other program. 

Rewrite the BIOS or check to see if there is an extension from an application or other 

program. 



POST messages (Continued) 

Message 

ERROR INITIALIZING HARD 

DISK CONTROLLER 

FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER 

ERROR OR NO 

CONTROLLER PRESENT 

FLOPPY DISK(S) FAIL (40) 

FLOPPY DISK(S) FAIL (80) 

HARD DISK(S) FAIL (08) 





KEYBOARD ERROR OR NO 

KEYBOARD PRESENT 

KEYBOARD IS LOCKED OUT 

— UNLOCK THE KEY. 

Description 

This message is displayed when initialization of the hard disk drive controller fails. 

Check to see if there is an error in the hard disk drive (IDE) settings via the BIOS setup 

utility or if there is a malfunction in the hard disk or the connection. 

If no problem was found, replace the main board. 

This message is displayed when initialization of the floppy disk drive controller fails. 

Check to see if there is an error in the floppy disk drive settings of the BIOS setup utility or if 

there is a malfunction of the floppy disk drive or the connection. 

If no problems were found, try replacing the main board to see if this solves the problem. 

This message is displayed when the floppy disk drive type does not match with the 

settings in the BIOS setup utility. 

Check to see if there is an error in the settings of the BIOS setup utility. 

Note that this error message will never be displayed if the floppy disk drive is being used 

with the recommended settings. 

This message is displayed when initialization of the floppy disk drive fails. 

Check to see if there is an error in the floppy disk drive settings of the BIOS setup utility or if 

there is a malfunction of the floppy disk drive or the connection. 


This message is displayed when a sector verify error occurs while accessing the hard disk. 

If the same error still occurs or this error occurs frequently after rebooting the system, the 

connection may be bad or there may be a malfunction of the hard disk or main board. 

Check the connection again and try replacing these parts in turn to see if this solves the 

problem. 

This message is displayed when a seek error occurs while accessing the hard disk head. 




problem. 

This message is displayed when initialization of the hard disk controller fails. 




problem. 

This message is displayed when a self-test of the hard disk controller fails. 




problem. 

This message is displayed when resetting of the hard disk controller fails. 




problem. 

This message is displayed when initialization of the keyboard controller fails. 

Check to see if there is an error in the keyboard settings of the BIOS setup utility. 


This message is displayed when there is no response from the keyboard at the 

initialization. 

If this message is displayed, try replacing the main board to see if this solves the problem. 


POST messages (Continued) 

Message 

MEMORY ADDRESS ERROR 

AT ... 

MEMORY PARITY ERROR AT 

... 

MEMORY VERIFY ERROR AT 

... 

MEMORY TEST FAIL 

MANUFACTURING POST 

LOOP 

PRESS A KEY TO REBOOT 

PRESS F1 TO DISABLE NMI, 

F2 TO REBOOT 

SYSTEM HALTED, (CTRL-ALT- 

DEL) TO REBOOT ... 

Description 

If an address error occurs during a memory test, that address is displayed. 

This error may be caused by a malfunction of the memory (DIMM) or the main board 

(including the memory controller). Try replacing these parts in turn to see if this solves the 

problem. 

If the memory has not been installed, this is indicated by an error beep at the early POST 

stage. 

If a data parity error occurs during a memory test, that address is displayed. 



problem. 

If the memory has not been installed, This is indicated by an error beep at the early POST 

stage. 

If a data verify error occurs during a memory test, that address is displayed. 



problem. 

If the memory has not been installed, This is indicated by an error beep at the early POST 

stage. 

This error is displayed when an unexpected memory error other than above occurs 

during a memory test. 



problem. 

If no memory has been installed, this is indicated by an error beep in the early POST 

stage. 

This message is displayed when POST processing cannot be completed for some reason 

(most likely due to errors related to the keyboard). 

If no errors were found in the keyboard, hard disk, and floppy disk drive, try replacing the 

main board. 

This message is displayed when an error that can be fixed by rebooting by a method 

other than software reset (CTRL+ALT+DEL) is found. 

Press a key to reboot the system. 

If this error occurs frequently, there may be a malfunction of the main board or problems 

in the system configuration. Try replacing the main board or check to see if there are any 

problems in the system configuration. 

This message is displayed when a Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) occurs during POST. 

Press F1 to clear the NMI and then continue with POST. 

Press F2 to reboot. 


in the system configuration. Try replacing the main board or check to see if there are any 

problems in the system configuration. 

This message is displayed when an error that can be fixed only by rebooting using 

software reset (CTRL+ALT+DEL) is found. 

Reboot the BIOS by using the software reset (CTRL+ALT+DEL). 


in the system configuration. Try replacing the main board to see if this solves the problem. 



Procedures for Testing the Power Supply 

Setup 

CAUTION: 

In the interests of safety be sure to conduct checks with the power supply disconnected 

from the main circuit board. 

❏ 

❏ 

Tester 

Wire × 1 (for On signal input) 

❏ 

Use the following procedures to test the power supply. 

Note: 

Protective circuits that protect against shorts, over current, and overheating are installed in the power 

supply. In cases where these circuits shut down the power supply, power will not come back on if the 

power supply is turned on immediately after being turned off. It is necessary to wait for a period of at 

least fifteen seconds before turning the power back on. 

1. Disconnect connectors of the power supply from each board. 

2. Using a wire, short pins 14 and 15 on the power supply’s 20-pin connector. 

3. Connect the power cable. 

4. If the power supply fan isn't revolving, spin the power supply fan. 


5. Measure the voltage between each terminal on the 20-pin connector and the voltage of 

all drive connectors. If the voltage differs from that shown on the chart below, replace 


11 

20 

1 

20-pin connector 

10 

HDD End of Power Cable 

FDD and CD-ROM End of Power Cable 

Yellow(+12V) 

Black(+24V) 

Black(GND) 

White(GND) 

COM Port Circuit Board End of Power Cable 

Power supply voltage check 

Voltage system Measurement terminals Normal voltage 

+3.3 V system Pin 1 – pin 15 + 3.14 ~ + 3.47 V 

Pin 2 – pin 15 

Pin 11 – pin 15 

+5 V system Pin 4 – pin 15 + 4.75 ~ + 5.25 V* 

Pin 6 – pin 15 

Pin 19 – pin 15 

Pin 20 – pin 15 

+5 VSB system Pin 9 – pin 15 + 4.75 ~ + 5.25 V 

+12 V system Pin 10 – pin 15 + 11.4 ~ + 12.6 V 

–12 V system Pin 12 – pin 15 – 10.8 ~ – 13.2 V 

+24 V system 

* Voltage range when electric current of 1A and more is consumed. 



6. Disconnect the wire shorting pins 14 and 15 on the power supply’s 20-pin connector. 

Check that the power is off. If the voltages are not normal, replace the power supply. 

Power Supply Cable’s Voltage Check (*) 

Measurement terminals Signal name 

1 +12 VDC 

Shell 

Frame GND 

top of the 

connector 

Shell 

Power supply connector 

This connector is used to connect the display (DM-M820) to an external power source. The above 

illustration indicates the connector connected to the display directly. 




Chapter 9 

Disassembly and Assembly 

This portion of the chapter provides instructions for disassembling the DM-M820. To 

reassemble the DM-M820, reverse the steps in this chapter, except where special instructions are 

given. 

Directions for each procedure in this chapter, such as up and down, right and left, or top and 

bottom, are as seen from the front of this product. 

Required Tools 

The tools required for servicing and maintaining the MR series are listed in the table below. 

Table 9-1 Required tools 

Tools Size/Spec. Application Source 

Tester — For inspecting the power 

supply (power supply unit) 

Use commercially 

available product. 

Crosshead screwdrivers No. 1, No. 2 Disassembly and assembly Use commercially 


Flathead screwdriver — Disassembly and assembly Use commercially 


Wristbands (static electricity 

protection) 

— Disassembly and assembly Use commercially 


Hexagonal screwdriver or radial 

pliers 

5 mm, 6 mm 

(hexagonal 

screwdriver) 

Disassembly and assembly 

Use commercially 


Touch panel position adjust jig — Disassembly and assembly Use the product 

supplied by EPSON. 

When assembling and disassembling the various MR modules, it may be necessary to use tools 

other than those listed in table above. 

You can use cotton gloves instead of the wristbands. 

Rev. I Disassembly and Assembly 9-1

Disassembly and Assembly of the DM-M820 

There are three models of the DM-M820. The DM-M820-013/023 is the model without a touch 

panel and without an MSR. The DM-M820-014/024 is the model with a touch panel and with an 

MSR. The DM-M820-015/025 is the model with a touch panel and without an MSR. 

The method of dissassembly of the inside components depends on when the unit was 

manufactured. 

Determining which procedure to use 

Check the label on the manufacture's plate at the base of the DM-M820. 

❏ SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx* :Removing the component (See page 9-10) 

• The attaching method of the touch panel of DM-M820 models shown in the following 

table is different from other models. (See page 9-22) 

Model 

DM-M820-014 

DM-M820-024 

DM-M820-015 

DM-M820-025 

Serial No 

Later than EFZV002077 

Later than E6UV000379 

Later than EWSV001364 

Later than E6VV000057 

❏ 

Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*: 

:Removing the component (See page 9-27) 

9-2 Disassembly and Assembly Rev. I

Precautions Before Assembly and Disassembly 


WARNING: 

Wait several minutes after turning off the power and disconnecting the AC before 

starting disassembly work. 

This precaution is necessary because as long as this product’s power supply is on, 

portions of the internal circuits are charged with extremely high voltages. 

CAUTION: 

Most of the components used in the manufacture of the circuit boards, LCD, and touch 

panel are static-sensitive devices. To prevent damage from static electricity, always 

wear a grounded wrist strap when handling any circuit boards or cables inside the 

DM-M820. 

While the power is on, some parts inside this product reach high temperatures. Since 

there is a danger of burns or other injuries, be sure to wait several minutes after turning 

the power off before starting disassembly work. 

Be careful not to injure yourself with the sharp edges of the metal parts of the DM-M820. 

The LCD panel surface is easy to scratch, so use sufficient caution when handling it. 

The cold-cathode tube of the backlight is made of glass. Impact or abnormal stress can 

damage it, so use sufficient caution when handling it. 

If dirt or dust collects on the fluorescent tube during work, it may cause the brightness to 

be irregular. Dirt or dust on the LCD panel or touch panel can reduce the display quality. 

So, use sufficient caution when handling the DM-M820. 

To avoid damage during reassembly, do not apply pressure to any circuit boards when 

you fasten them in place. 

When reattaching the rear plate to the front panel unit, fasten the 10 screws (S05) for 

the connectors first. Then secure the 4 hex screws (S07). Otherwise, the connectors may 

be broken. 

Note: 

All the outside screws are covered by caps. Carefully remove these caps when you need to remove the 

screws. Be sure to save the caps and replace them after reassembly. 

When you attach the rear panel, be careful not to catch the cables connected to the switch circuit board 

between the unit and case. 


Conceptual Work Diagram for DM-M820 

Rear cover (103) 

Top cover of 

Base assembly 

Front cover (102) 

(*) 

MSR assembly (106) 

Rear case attached 

with Base assembly 

(*) 

LED circuit board (1045) Base assembly (117) 

Hinge Assemblies (118) 

Rear case (108) 

Rear panel (1042) 

Front case (109) 

LCD circuit board 

(111) 

(*) 

Touch panel circuit board 

(116) 

Inverter circuit board 

(112) 

DC Jack board 

(122) 

Front case (109) 

(*) 

Touch panel assembly (1056) 

or Touch panel unit (115) 

LCD (110) 

Switch circuit board 

(113) 

Note: 

The above diagram is based on the DM-M820-014/024 model. 

(*1) It is necessary for DM-M820-013/023 to do the procedures marked by an asterisk (*) in the diagram 

above. 

(*2) It is necessary for DM-M820-015/025 to do without the procedures marked by an asterisk (*) in the 

diagram above. So to disassemble and assemble the this model, read the explanation without an MSR in 

this chapter. 

How to use this diagram: 

1. Search for the target part enclosed in a solid line (not parts enclosed in a dotted line). 

2. Trace the line from the target part to START. 

3. You must remove all the parts or units shown on the route that you have traced. 

Note that the steps of disconnecting cables and removing plates on the units are not described in 

this key map. 



Disassembling the Base Assembly 

Base Assembly(117) 

Follow the steps below to disassemble the unit. 

1. Disconnect the cables from the IM-800 connectors and the DC12V outlet. 

2. Remove 1 screw (1049) securing the top cover of the base assembly. 

3. Remove the top cover of the base assembly. 

screw (1049) 

top cover of the base assembly 

base assembly 

4. Remove 8 screws securing the bottom plate. Remove the bottom plate. 

screw (1047) 

screw (1047) 

screw (1046) 

screw (1046) 

bottom plate 


5. Remove 4 screws (1048) securing the base assembly to the display hinges. Then, remove 

the base assembly. 

hinge assemblies 

screw (1048) 

screw(1048) 

6. Pull the cables out from the base assembly as shown below. (The model with an MSR unit is 

used in the illustration below.) 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 

To install, reverse the removal procedure. 



Hinge Assemblies 

Follow the steps below for disassembly. 

Note: 

The hinges on your display may not look exactly like those below. 

1. Remove 4 screws (S01) securing the hinges to the rear case, and remove the display. 

screw (S01) 

screw (S01) 

2. Remove 1 screw (1049) securing the top cover of the base assembly. Remove the cover. 

(See page 9-8) 

3. Remove 4 screws (1048) securing the base assembly to the hinge assemblies. Remove the 

hinge assemblies. (See page 9-5.) 



Removing the Covers 

Rear Cover 

The instructions below describe the all models of the DM-M820. 

1. Remove 6 screw caps and screws securing the rear cover. Then, remove the rear cover. 

screw (S01) 

rear cover 

screw (S01) 

screw (S02) 

screw (S02) 

Follow the steps below to assemble the unit. 

1. Confirm the cables’s connection to the rear case. And when reattaching the covers, be careful 

not to catch the cables in the covers. (Wrap tape around the cables to hold them together for 

easier replacement beneath the cover.) (The model with an MSR is used in the illustration 

below.) 

tape 

cable 

cables 

Note: 

Be careful not to catch the cables between the unit and cover. 

2. Attach the rear cover. 



Front Cover 

1. Remove the rear cover. (See page 9-8.) 

2. Remove 2 screw caps and screws (S09) securing the front cover. Then, remove the front 

cover. 

screw (S09) 

screw (S09) 

front cover 



Removing the Components (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) 

When removing the components for which the SERIAL NO is *xxxx01xxxx*, see page 9-27. 

MSR Assembly or LED Circuit Board 


2. Disconnect 1 screw (S01) and remove the front cable clamp. 

3. Remove 3 screws (S01) securing the MSR assembly to the front cover. And disconnect the 

connector of the LED cable from the MSR assembly. 

MSR 

LED cable 

screw (S10) 

cable clamp 

screw (S10) 

screw (S01) 

) 


1. Confirm the connection of the cables, following the figure above. 

2. Install the rear cover. (See page 9-8.) 

To replace the LED circuit board, follow the steps below.. 


2. Remove 3 screws securing (S01) the MSR assembly to the front cover. And disconnect the 

connector of the LED cable from the MSR assembly. (See the illustration above.) 

3. Remove 1 screw (S03) securing the LED circuit board. 

screw (S03) 

LED circuit board 



Rear Case 


2. Remove the front cover. (See page 9-9.) 

3. Remove the cables. 

DM-M820-013 

DM-M820-014 

/015 

4. Remove the hinge assemblies from the rear case. (See page 9-10.) 

5. Remove 2 screws (S04) and 2 hex screws (S06) securing the rear case. And remove the rear 

case. (The model with an MSR is used in the illustration below.) 

screw (S04) 

screw (S04) 

rear case 

plate attached to 

the rear case 

hex screw (S06) 


Note: 

You need to attach the plate to the rear case you ordered. Because the part is not supplied with the case 

unit. 


Removing the Front Case 

1. Remove the rear case.(See page 9-11.) 

2. Remove 2 screws (S15) securing the LCD assembly to the front case. After then remove 2 

screws (S05) holding 2 ground wires (one on each side) and lift up the ground wires. (The 

model with a touch panel is used in the illustration below.) 

screw (S05 ) and ground wire 

screw (S15) 

screw (S15) 

front panel unit holding 

LCD assembly 

front case 

screw (S05 ) and ground wire 

cable shown in top photo 

screw (S05) 

Note: 

The ground wires are not attached to the model without a touch panel. 

3. Remove the front panel unit holding LCD assembly from the front case. (See the 

illustration above.) 


CAUTION: 





Rear panel 




3. Remove the rear case. (See page 9-11.) 

4. Remove hex screws (S07). 

DM-M820-014/024/015/025 

DM-M820-013/023 

5. Remove 8 screws (S05) securing the rear panel to the LCD assembly. Then remove 2 screws 

(S05) holding 2 ground wires (one on each side) and lift up the ground wires. After that 

remove the rear panel. 

screw (S05 ) and cable 

screws (S05) 

screws (S05) 

screw (S05) 

rear panel 

screws (S05) 

screws (S05) 

screw (S05 ) and cable 

Note: 



Touch Panel Circuit Board 





4. Remove the rear panel. (See page 9-13.) 

5. Remove 4 screws (1051), and remove the touch panel circuit board. 

cables connected to 

the switch circuit board 

screw (1051) 

touch panel circuit board 

cables 

screws (1051) 




LCD Circuit Board 

Follow the steps below for disassembly for the model DM-M820-014/024 and DM-M820-015/ 

025. 


2. Remove 4 hex screws (S07) (two each for the two connectors). (See page 9-13.) 

3. Remove 10 screws (S05) securing the rear panel to the LCD assembly. After that remove the 

rear panel. (See page 9-13.) 

4. Disconnect the 4 cables shown below. Remove 2 screws (1050) holding 2 ground wires and 

lift up the ground wires, then remove 2 screws (1050) securing the plate. 

screw (1050) and 

ground wire 



cables 

cable 

cable: See 

Caution below 


ground wire 


screws (1050) 

CAUTION: 

Remove the cable on the right side very carefully because its connection is not 

strong. 

5. Remove the LCD circuit board. 


Follow the steps below for disassembly for the model DM-M820-013/023 (without a touch panel 

and an MSR). 


2. Remove 2 hex screws (S07). (See page 9-13.) 




4. Disconnect the 3 cables from the LCD circuit board, and remove 2 screws (1050) holding 2 

ground wires and lift up the ground wires. After that remove the 2 screws (1050) securing 

the plate. 

cable 


ground wire 



cables 

cable: See 

Caution below 


ground wire 


screw (1050) 

screw (1050) 

CAUTION: 


strong. 





Inverter Circuit Board 

Follow the steps below for disassembly for the model DM-M820-014 and DM-M820-015/025. 


2. Remove 4 hex screws (S07) (two each for the two connectors). (See page 9-13.) 



4. Disconnect 2 cables and remove 2 screws (1052). Remove the inverter circuit board. 

cable 

screw (1052) 



inverter circuit board 

screw (1052) 

cable 


Follow the steps below for disassembly for the model DM-M820-013/023 (without a touch panel 

and an MSR). 


2. Remove 2 hex screws (S07). (See page 9-13.) 

3. Remove 10 screws (S05) securing the rear panel to the LCD assembly. (See page 9-13.) 

4. Disconnect 2 cables and remove 2 screws (1052). Remove the inverter circuit board. 

cable 

screw (1052) 




screw (1052) 

cable 



Removing the Touch Panel Assembly 

Follow the steps below to disassemble the touch panel assembly (1056). 


2. Remove the front case from the front panel unit. (See page 9-13.) 


4. Remove the LCD circuit board. (See page 9-15.) 

5. Disconnect the touch panel cable from the cable for the circuit board, as shown below, by 

releasing the patch, and remove the touch panel cable. 

cable connection 

cable for the circuit board 

patch 

touch panel cable 

locked 

released 

Note: 

Be careful not to get any foreign material between the LCD and the touch panel. 



6. Remove the screws (S05) securing the touch panel assembly to the front panel unit. Then 

remove the touch panel assembly by lifting up it. 

screws (S05) 

touch panel 

screws (S05) 

front panel unit 

Note: 

Lift up the touch panel assembly carefully. Otherwise, the double-coated electric-conductive tape attached 

to each plate and the LCD unit will come off incorrectly. 

When reattaching the touch panel assembly, align the position of the holes in the touch panel assembly and 

the front panel unit. Otherwise, the plates may be attached to the front panel unit incorrectly with the 

double-coated electric-conductive tape. Then you cannot reuse the same tape after you realign the screw 

holes. 


If you reattach the touch panel assembly (1056), follow the steps below. 

1. Place the touch panel assembly on the front panel unit to align the position of the each screw 

holes. 

2. Then attach the touch panel assembly to the front panel unit with the 4 screws (S05). 

position of the screw holes 

When you replace the touch panel assembly itself, follow the steps below for reassembly: 


1. Remove the exfoliation paper attached with double-coated electric-conductive tape on the 

upper plate and lower plates. The illustration below shows the position of the exfoliation 

paper. 

exfoliation paper 

2. Place the upper plate and the lower plate on the front panel unit, moving them to the center 

to align the position of the screw holes. 


lower plate (121) upper plate (120) 

3. Attach the plates to the front panel unit with the 4 screws (S05).) 

screw (S05) 

screw (S05) 



4. Remove the 6 pieces of exfoliation paper attached to the plates. 

upper plate (120) 

exfoliation paper 

lower plate (121) 

5. Use the touch panel position adjust jig to adjust the position of the touch panel. 

touch panel 

position adjust jig 

6. Attach the touch panel, being careful to align the corners. 

position of the characters 

touch panel (115) 

Note: 

Be sure to attach the touch panel with the character side up. 

7. Press the touch panel down so that the double-coated tape is bonded to the touch panel. 


CAUTION: 

To remove the touch panel position adjust jig, lift it up straight. Otherwise it may be 

damaged. 

Follow the steps below to attach the touch panel unit (115). 

Removing the Touch Panel Unit 

The first step is same to some steps (from 1 to 5) for removing the touch panel assembly(it is 

indicated in the explainment above). 

Note: 

In the product made at first, a spacer is attched on LCD. When replacing the touch panel unit, remove the 

spacer before attaching the touch panel unit. 

LCD 

spacer 

6. Unit the position of the hole of the touch panel unit and front panel unit. 

7. Fix the touch panel unit with 2 screws (S05) at the 2 holes (E,F). After that, attach it with 2 

screws (S05) at the 2 holes (G,H). (Refer to the below figure.) 



Note: 

The front panel unit of the OLD model has only two screw holes. Therefore, when replacing it with new 

one, attach the new touch panel using two-sided tape instead of screws at two places (G ,H) 

When the front panel unit is a new frame, screw 

four places (E,F,G,H) 

E 

F 

When the front panel unit is an old frame, two 

places (G,H) cannot be screwed. 

Therefore, attach the touch panel unit to the 

rear panel using the two-sided tape at two 

places. 

tape 

G 


touch panel unit 

H 

Two holes for installing the screw exist on the 

back frame (new type). 

back frame 

hole for installing the screw 


LCD 


025. 

Note: 

If you remove the LCD for the model DM-M820-013/023, follow the steps below except step 5. 


2. Remove the front case. (See page 9-13.) 


4. Remove the LCD Circuit Board. (See page 9-15.) 

5. Remove the touch panel unit or touch panel assembly. (See page 9-18 or page 9-22.) 

6. Disconnect 1 cable from the inverter circuit board. 

cable 


7. Remove 4 screws (S16) securing the LCD. 

screw (S16) 

screw (S16) 

LCD 

screw (S16) 

screw (S16) 



8. Remove the LCD while pulling the cable from the hole. 

hole 

hole 


Switch Circuit Board 


025. 

Note: 






5. Remove the touch panel. (See page 9-18.) 

6. Remove the LCD. (See page 9-24.) 


. 

7. Remove 1 screw (1050) holding 1 ground wire and lift up the ground wire. After that remove 

1 screw (1050) securing the switch circuit board. 

screw (1050) 

switch circuit board 


ground wire 

8. Remove the switch circuit board while pulling the cable from the hole. 

hole 




Removing the Components (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) 

If removing components with SERIAL NO *xxxx00xxxx*, see page 9-10. 

MSR Assembly or LED Circuit Board 


2. Disconnect 1 screw (S01) and remove the front cable clamp. 

3. Remove 3 screws (S01) securing the MSR assembly to the front cover. And disconnect the 

connector of the LED cable from the MSR assembly. 

MSR 

LED cable 

screw (S10) 

cable clamp 

screw (S10) 

screw (S01) 

) 


1. Confirm the connection of the cables, following the figure above. 

2. Install the rear cover. (See page 9-8.) 

To replace the LED circuit board, follow the steps below.. 


2. Remove 3 screws securing (S01) the MSR assembly to the front cover. And disconnect the 

connector of the LED cable from the MSR assembly. (See the illustration above.) 

3. Remove 1 screw (S03) securing the LED circuit board. 

screw (S03) 

LED circuit board 


Rear Case 



3. Remove the cables. 

4. Remove the hinge assemblies from the rear case. (See page 9-10.) 

5. Remove 2 screws (S04) and 2 hex screws (S06) securing the rear case. And remove the rear 

case. (The model with an MSR is used in the illustration below.) 

screw (S04) 

screw (S04) 

rear case 

plate attached to 

the rear case 



Note: 

You need to attach the plate to the rear case you ordered. Because the part is not supplied with the case 

unit. 



Removing the Front Case 

1. Remove the rear case.(See page 9-11.) 

2. Remove 2 screws (S15) securing the LCD assembly to the front case. 

screw (S15) 

screw (S15) 

front panel unit holding 

LCD assembly 

front case 

3. Remove the front case. 


CAUTION: 




Rear panel 





4. Remove 4 hex screws (S07). 

DM-M820-014/024/015/025 


rear panel. 

screws (S05) 

screws (S05) 

screw (S05) 

rear panel 

screws (S05) 

screws (S05) 

Note: 



Touch Panel Circuit Board 







5. Remove 4 hex screws (S07) and remove the cable. 

touch panel 

circuit board(116) 

hex screw(S07) 

cable 

6. Disconnect the 2 cables shown below. Remove 2 screws (1051), and remove the touch panel 

circuit board. 

touch panel 

circuit board(116) 

cable 

screw (1051) 

cable 

screw (1051) 



LCD Circuit Board 






5. Disconnect the 3 cables shown below. Remove 3 screws (1050). 

cable 

screw (1050) 

cable 

screw (1050) 

LCD circuit 

board (111) 

CAUTION: 


strong. 





Inverter Circuit Board 






5. Disconnect the 5 cables shown below. Remove 3 screws (1052). 

screw (1052) 

Inverter circuit 

board (112) 

cable 

cable 

6. Remove the Inverter circuit board. 



DC Jack Board 






5. Disconnect the 1 cable shown below. Remove 2 screws (1052). 

cable 

DC Jack board(122) 

screw (1052) 

6. Remove the DC Jack board. 




Removing the Touch Panel Assembly 







6. Release the lock of the connector at the cable connection part. Unplug the touch panel cable 

out from the cable of the touch panel board. 

Cable of the touch 

panel board 

Touch panel cable 

Cable connection part 

Note: 

Be careful not to get any foreign material between the LCD and the touch panel. 


7. Remove four screws (S05) securing the touch panel set to the front panel unit while lifting 

the touch panel set. 

screw (S05) 

screw (S05) 

Touch panel set 

(1056) 


Note: 

Attach the touch panel set (1056) after removing dust from the touch panel set and the surface of the LCD 

with an air sprayer. 

When reattaching the touch panel assembly, align the position of the holes in the touch panel assembly and 

the front panel unit. 



LCD 







6. Remove the touch panel assembly. (See page 9-14.) 

7. Disconnect 2 cables from the inverter circuit board and disconnect 1 cable from the LCD 

circuit board. 

cable 

cable 

LCD circuit 

board (111) 

Inverter circuit 

board (112) 


8. Remove 4 screws (S16) and remove the LCD. 

screw (S16) 

LCD (110) 

screw (S16) 

Note: 

When attaching the LCD set, be careful not to insert the cable between the LCD and the frame. 



. 


Switch Circuit Board 


025. 

Note: 






5. Remove the touch panel. (See page 9-18.) 

6. Remove the LCD. (See page 9-24.) 

7. Remove 1 screw (1050) holding 1 ground wire and lift up the ground wire. After that remove 

1 screw (1050) securing the switch circuit board. 

screw (1050) 

switch circuit board 


ground wire 

8. Remove the switch circuit board while pulling the cable from the hole. 

hole 



Disassembly and Assembly of the IM-800 

This portion of the chapter provides instructions for disassembling the IM-800. 

WARNING: 

Wait several minutes after turning off the power and disconnecting the AC before 

starting disassembly work. 

This precaution is necessary because as long as this product’s power supply is on, 

portions of the internal circuits are charged with extremely high voltages. 

CAUTION: 

While the power is on, some parts inside this product reach high temperatures. Since 

there is a danger of burns or other injuries, be sure to wait several minutes after turning 

the power off before starting disassembly work. 

Be careful not to injure yourself with the sharp edges of the metal parts of the IM-800. 

Note: 

There is a label with the MAC address on it on the main circuit board. (See the illustration of the main 

circuit board below for the location of the label.) 

label with the MAC address 



Conceptual Work Diagram for IM-800 

IM-800 rear case 

(203) 

IM-800 upper case 

(1009) 

(*) (*) 

(*) 

CD/FDD bracket 

(1008) 

GASKET, B (226) 

SPRING, A (227) 

Riser frame (1006) 

DC 24V board (225) 

CD-ROM (219) 

System fan (214) 

DIMM (204) 

CD/FDD bracket (1008) 

COM port circuit board 

(209) 

FDD (211) 

HDD bracket (1007) 

Riser circuit board 

(208) 

2.5"HDD (206) 

3.5"HDD (206) 

DIMM (204) 

Power supply (213) 

CPU cooler (215) 

Speaker (223) 

CPU (205) 

Main circuit board 

(207) 

(*)With the TM Printer Power Supply model 

How to use this diagram: 

1. Search for the target part enclosed in a solid line (not parts enclosed in a dotted line). 

2. Trace the line from the target part to START. 

3. You must remove all the parts or units shown on the route that you have traced. 

Note that the steps of disconnecting cables and removing plates on the units are not described in 

this key map. 


Removing the IM-800 Rear Case 

To remove the IM-800 rear case, follow these steps: 

1. Remove 3 screws indicated by the arrows below. 

IM-800 rear case 

2. Remove the IM-800 rear case. 


Removing the Covers 

IM-800 Upper Case 

1. Remove the two screws (S13) indicated below: 

screw (S13) 

2. Push the IM-800 rear case toward the front of the unit and then lift it off as shown below. 

IM-800 upper case 



3. If it is necessary to remove the IM-800 front case assembly (usually it is not necessary to 

remove it), remove the 5 screws (S11) shown below and remove the IM-800 front case 

assembly. 

screw (S11) 

screw (S11) 

IM-800 front case assembly 


Removing the Compornents 

Riser Frame 

1. Remove the IM-800 upper case. (See page 9-42.) 

2. Remove the screw (S13) indicated below. 

riser frame 

COM cable 


P2 cable 

screw (S13) 

3. Remove the P2 cable and COM cable. Then lift the riser frame out of the IM-800. 


COM Port Circuit Board Assembly 


2. Remove the riser frame. (See page 9-43.) 

3. Remove the screw (S13) securing the COM port circuit board (indicated below) to remove 

the COM port circuit board. 

screw (S13) 


PCI Card 

A PCI card can be inserted into the upper slot on the riser frame. 



3. Remove the screw (S13) securing the PCI board (indicated below) to remove the PCI card. 

PCI card 

screw (S13) 

When replacing the PCI card, remove the dummy plate, if it is installed. 

CAUTION: 

Do not touch the connectors on the card to avoid failure due to contamination. 



RAID Card 

A RAID card can be inserted into the upper slot on the riser frame. 



3. Remove the HDD cable from the RAID card. 

HDD cable 

RAID card 

4. Remove the screw (S13) securing the PCI board (indicated below) to remove the RAID card. 

RAID card 

screw (S13) 

When replacing the PCI card, remove the dummy plate, if it is installed. 

CAUTION: 

Do not touch the connectors on the card to avoid failure due to contamination. 


Riser Circuit Board 



3. Remove the screw (S13) securing the COM port circuit board (indicated below) to remove 

the COM port circuit board. 

screw (S13) 


4. Remove the two screws (S13) securing the riser circuit board indicated in the illustration 

below to remove the riser circuit board. 

screw (S13) 

riser circuit board 


DC24V board 


2. Remove two screws (S17) fixing the DC24V board. 

DC24V board 

screw (S13) 



3. Remove the DC24V board by the procedures of 1 - 3. 

4. Remove the cable of the power supply unit. 


Note: 

Install the Power supply connecter for the DC 24V board just level with the rear case surface. 

NG 

OK 


SPRING, A 


2. Remove the SPRING ,A from the frame as the figure. 

DC24V board 

SPRING, A 

Install by the following procedure 

1. Remove the double-sides tape under the frame. 

2. Paste a new double-sides tape ,A under the frame. 

Frame 

Double-sides tape ,A 

3. Insert the SPRING ,A 

4. Pinch the flame and the SPRING ,A with fingers to bond with the double-side tape. 



CD/FDD Bracket 


2. Remove the CD-ROM cable (A), the audio cable (B), and the CD-ROM power cable (C) 

indicated below. Then remove the screws (S13) from locations D, E and F, also indicated 

below. 

E 

A B C 

dabo 

D 

stopper 

F 

Note: 

When you install the CD/FDD bracket, be certain that the stopper attached to the frame securely and 

attached the screw to the locations D. (See the illustration above.) 

3. Lift the CD/FDD bracket in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration below. 


hooks 

Note: 

When you install the CD/FDD bracket, be certain that the 2 hooks lock securely. (See the illustration 

above.) 

Be careful not to pinch the cable when installing the CD/FDD bracket. 


Note: 

The position of the power supply cable is different for 3.5”HDD or 2.5”HDD. 

3.5”HDD Model 

Power 

supply 

3.5"HDD 

CD-ROM 

FDD 


Power 

supply 

2.5"HDD 

CD-ROM 

FDD 

4. Remove the FDD cable from the FDD circuit board. 

FDD circuit board 



CD-ROM 


2. Remove the CD/FDD bracket. (See page 9-49.) 

3. Remove the four screws (1020) indicated in the below illustration. 

Note: 

Rest two screws (1020) is attached to the side of opposite plate. 

screw (1020) 


4. Remove the CD-ROM in the direction of the arrow. 

CD-ROM 

audio connector 


Note: 

Be careful not to break the audio connector inside the CD/FDD bracket. (See the illustration above.) 


FDD 



3. Remove the CD-ROM from the CD/FDD bracket. (See page 9-51.) 

4. Remove the two screws (S12) indicated in the below illustration. 


screw (S12) 

5. Remove the FFC cable from the FDD by releasing the patch. 

FFC cable 

patch 

6. Remove the FDD in the direction of the arrow. 


Note: 

When you replace the FDD, attach the FFC with the tape. When reattaching the FDD, attach the tape. 

(See the illustration below). 

FFC cable 

tape 



HDD bracket 




4. Remove the HDD power cable (P3) from the HDD. 

Note: 

The position of the power supply cable is different for 3.5”HDD or 2.5”HDD. 


Power 

supply 

3.5"HDD 

CD-ROM 

FDD 


Power 

supply 

2.5"HDD 

CD-ROM 

FDD 

3.5”HDD HDD bracket HDD power cable (P3) 2.5”HDD HDD bracket HDD power cable (P3) 

CAUTION: 

Be careful not to injure yourself with the sharp edges of the metal parts of the 

IM-800. 

5. Lift the HDD bracket in the direction of the arrow. (See the illustration above.) 


6. Remove the HDD cable(216) from the Main circuit board. 

HDD cable 



3.5”HDD 

The IM-800 has 3.5”HDD type and 2.5”HDD type. 




4. Remove the HDD bracket, HDD power cable and HDD cable. (See page 9-53.) 

5. Remove the HDD assembly in the direction of the arrow. 

Note: 

When you install the HDD assembly, the 4 clips must be hooked completely. 

clips 

clips 

HDD assembly 

6. Remove the 3 screws (S13) shown below. 

HDD bracket 

screw (S13) 

L 

screws (S13) 

L 


CAUTION: 

Be careful not to drop the HDD when you remove it from the HDD bracket. 

7. Pull out the 3.5”HDD from the HDD bracket while lifting up the 3.5”HDD in the direction of 

the arrow. Then disconnect the HDD cable and remove the 3.5”HDD. 

3.5”HDD 

HDD cable 


CAUTION: 

Be careful not to injure yourself on the sharp edges of the metal parts of the IM-800. 



2.5”HDD 

The IM-800 has 3.5”HDD type and 2.5”HDD type. 




4. Remove the HDD bracket, HDD power cable and HDD cable. (See page 9-53.) 

5. Remove the HDD assembly in the direction of the arrow. 

Note: 

When you install the HDD assembly, the 4 clips must be hooked completely. 

clips 

clips 

HDD assembly 

6. Remove the 3 screws (S13) shown below. 

HDD bracket 

screw (S13) 

L 

screws (S13) 

L 


CAUTION: 

Be careful not to drop the HDD when you remove it from the HDD bracket. 

Be careful not to pinch the HDD cable when screwing. 

7. Pull out the 2.5”HDD from the HDD bracket while lifting up the 2.5”HDD in the direction of 

the arrow. Then disconnect the HDD cable and remove the 2.5”HDD. 

2.5”HDD 

HDD cable 

CAUTION: 

Be careful not to injure yourself on the sharp edges of the metal parts of the IM-800. 

8. Remove two screws securing the 2HDD circuit board and remove the 2HDD circuit board. 

2HDD circuit board 

2.5”HDD 

9. When two HDDs are installed, remove the four screws shown in the figure below securing 

the 2.5”HDD and remove the HDD. 

2.5”HDD 

2HDD plate 



10. To remove the second 2.5”HDD remove the four screws shown in the figure below securing 

the HDD and remove the SHORTPLUG for the 2.5”HDD. 

SHORT PLUG 

2.5”HDD 

When you install two 2.5”HDD, the master or slave can be installed on the top or bottom. 

When you install the 2.5”HDD, you need to set the HDD jumpers properly. 

When connecting two 2.5”HDDs, one is Master and the other is Slave. 

Set Master/Slave by the jumper of the HDD. 

As for the procedure, see "HDD". 

Example: For the Hitach Travelstar 

Master 

Slave 

PIN1 



DIMM 



3. Open the tabs securing the DIMM at each end, as shown below. Then lift the DIMM out of 

the socket. 




System Fan 



3. Disconnect the system fan cable from the connector indicated below. 

system fan cable 

4. Remove the two screws (1015) securing the system fan to the frame. 

CAUTION: 

When you remove or install the system fan, be sure to press the top of the system 

fan as indicated by the arrow while you remove or insert the screws. Otherwise you 

may bend the frame. And confirm the direction of installing the system fan. (See 

the illustration below.) 

Also, do not tighten the screws too tightly or the unit may be damaged. (The 

maximum torque is 9 kgf•cm.) 

screws (1015) 

5. Remove the system fan from the frame. 



Switch cable assembly (218) 



3. Disconnect switch cable assembly (218) from the connector indicated below. 

power switch cable 

4. Disattach the hooks of the power switch from the frame back side. (The illustration below 

shows the front side of the frame.) 

power switch 

hooks 

Front side 

Back side 

Note: 

When you attach a power switch to the frame, be careful that it is not inside out. (The direction of the 

switch is indicated in the illustration above.) 



CPU Cooler and CPU 

Follow the steps below for removal. 

CAUTION: 

The CPU cooler on the CPU may be hot after you turn off the power. Wait until it cools 

before you remove it. 

Note: 

When you replace a CPU, you must replace the CPU cooler too because the silicone that attaches the 

cooler to the CPU will come off when you take the CPU cooler off of the CPU. 

When you replace a CPU cooler without replacing the CPU, confirm that the silicone comes completely off 

of the CPU. If any silicone is left on the CPU carefully remove it by using a kind of scraper. To avoid 

damage, do not use any metal scraper to remove the silicone. 



3. Remove the DIMM. (See page 9-60.) 

4. Disconnect the CPU cooler cable from connector J13. 

CPU cooler cable 

5. Then detach the metal hook from the tab, which is shown in the circle in the illustration 

below. Use radial pliers for the unhooking. Press downward on the projection and move it 

away from the cooler. 


CAUTION: 

Remove the clip very carefully to avoid damaging any main circuit board 

components. 

6. After you have unhooked one side of the CPU cooler, you can easily remove the CPU cooler 

by tilting it toward the other side and lifting it off. 

7. Lift the CPU release lever in the direction of the arrow in the illustration until it is upright, 

and then pull the CPU straight up. 

lever 

cut corner 

CAUTION: 

To avoid any damage from contamination or static electricity, do not touch the pin 

terminals of the CPU with your fingers. 


Note: 

When you install a CPU, be sure that the cut corner is in the position indicated in the illustration above. 



Speaker 




4. Remove the HDD bracket. (See page 9-53.) 

5. Remove the Power Supply. (See page 9-67.) 

6. Pull out the cable connecting the speaker from the main board. 

Speaker cable 

7. Remove two screws fixing the speaker. 

screw 

Note: 

There is the main board which cannot connect the speaker. The way of discerning is as follows. 

Main board which is able to attach the speaker 

Main board which is not able to attach the speaker 

Speaker Connector 


Install the Speaker by the following procedure 

1. Peel off the tape of the Speaker Spacer and paste it on the speaker. 

2. Adjust the Speaker cable to the lack of the Speaker holder and put the Speaker holder on the 

speaker. 

3. Attach the speaker with two screws. Attach screws in the position of the following figure. 

screw 

Note: 

Install the cable of the speaker to become an underside. 

Install the speaker so as not to touch the frame of the IM-800. 

When installing the Power Supply, form the speaker cable so as not to be pinched. 



Power Supply 





5. Remove the two screws (S13) securing the power supply. 

screw (S13) 

6. Remove the power cables connected to the main circuit board. 

7. Cut the cable tie and remove the DC24V cable from the DC24V board. (24V model) 

DC 24V cable 

cable tie 

Note: 

When installing the DC24V cable, use a new cable tie. 


8. Remove the power supply from the lower frame by first moving it in the direction of 

arrow 1, then in the direction of arrow 2. 

2 

1 

lower frame 


Note: 

During reassembly confirm that the power supply is attached to the lower frame as shown in the 

illustration above. 

CAUTION: 

Also, when you place the cable of power supply, put it under the USB cable. 

Do not arrange the cable of the power supply near the end of the case. Otherwise, it 

may be damaged when you install the IM-800 upper case or the CD/FDD bracket. 

Do not arrange the cable of the power supply under the main circuit board. Otherwise, 

it may be damaged when you connect the other cables to the main circuit board. 

USB cable 



Main Circuit Board 





5. Remove the DIMM. (See page 9-60.) 

6. Remove the CPU cooler and CPU. (See page 9-63.) 

7. Remove the cables on the main circuit board. 

8. Remove the 5 screws (S13) shown in the figure below and remove the main circuit board. 

screw (S13) 

screw (S13) 

screw (S13) 



Note: 

When you change the main circuit board, you can use both the CPU and the CPU cooler attached to the 

old board. You need not to replace the CPU or the CPU cooler. 

CAUTION: 

Also, when you place the cable of power supply, put it under the USB cable. 

Do not arrange the cable of the power supply near the end of the case. Otherwise, it 

may be damaged when you install the IM-800 upper case or the CD/FDD bracket. 

Do not arrange the cable of the power supply under the main circuit board. Otherwise, 

it may be damaged when you connect the other cables to the main circuit board. 

USB cable 

Note: 

Be sure to connect the cable with blue connector to the blue socket. 

One edge of each cable is colored red to help you see the proper orientation of the cables. Please note the 

correct orientation in the illustration below. 

CD-ROM cable 

FDD cable 

HDD cable (Blue) 



Appendix A 

Jumper Settings 

IM-800 Jumper Settings 

The jumper settings for the IM-800 are as follows: 

PCB Jumper Function Setting 

Main control 

board 

JP10 

Clearing the CMOS 

RAM 

1-2: Normal (default) 

2-3: Clear the CMOS RAM *1 

JP15 

Setting the serial IRQ 

for the PCI slot 

1-2: Does not connect the serial IRQ to PCI slot 

2-3: Connects the serial IRQ to PCI slot (default) 

COM board JP1 Setting pin 1 of the 

COM4 port 

1-2: DCD signal (default) 

3-4: +5V power supply 


JP2 

Setting pin 1 of the 

COM3 port 

1-2: DCD signal (default) 



*1 To clear the CMOS RAM, short 2-3 more than 5 seconds with the power turned off and then return the jumper to 

the default setting. 

2.5”HDD Jumper Settings 

When connecting two 2.5”HDDs, one is Master and the other is Slave. 

Set Master/Slave by the jumper of the HDD. 

As for the procedure, see "HDD". 

Example: For the Hitach Travelstar 

Master 

Slave 

PIN1 

Rev. I Jumper Settings A-1

DM-M820 Jumper Settings 

Jumper settings for the touch panel board 

Jumper Location 

Set 1 > Set 10 

SET 1, 2, and 3 are shorted. The others are open. 

LED of DM-M820 T/P board 

When power is supplied, the red LED lights. 

During data communication the green LED blinks. 

A-2 Jumper Settings Rev. I

MR Series Technical reference Manual 

Appendix B 

Parts Information 

Part Life 

The following table shows the life of IM-800 parts. 

Table B-1 IM-800 part life 

Ref.# Part name Life 

215 CPU cooler Approximately 80,000 

hours. 

- Power supply fan (*) Approximately 70.000 

hours. 

214 System fan Approximately 80.000 

hours. 

45°C 

45°C 

45°C 

(*) Power supply fan is not supplied for an after service parts. 

The following table shows the life of DM-M820 parts. 

Table B-2 DM-M820 part life 

Ref.# Part name Life Condition 

115 Touch panel Finger touch durability: 

1,000,000 times or more 

With the material polyacetal, with a load of 

2.45 N (250 gf), at three times per second 

or 

with the material silicon rubber, with a load 

of 2.94 N (300 gf), at three times per second 

Writing durability: 100,000 

characters or more 

With the material polyacetal, with a load of 

2.45 N (250 gf), 5,000 characters/hour 

(mean) with Japanese font in the range of 

10x10 mm 

- Backlight 20,000 hours or more 25°C ± 5°C {77°F ± 9°F} 

- MSR unit magnetic 

head 

300,000 times for reading 

magnetic cards 

- 

Rev. I Parts Information Appendix B-1

Confidential 

Part List DM-M820-013/023/113/123 

Table B-1 DM-M820-013/023 /113/123 

Ref. # Name for technical reference manual Name for spare parts price list Part supply Unit 

101 Cap, A Cap, A Yes 15 

102 Front cover Cable, cover, front Yes 1 

103 Rear cover Cable, cover, rear Yes 1 

108 Rear case LCD, rear assembly Yes 1 

109 Front case LCD, front case Yes 1 

110 LCD LCD Yes 1 

111 LCD circuit board LCD circuit board Yes 1 

112 Inverter circuit board Inverter circuit board Yes 1 

113 Switch circuit board Switch circuit board Yes 1 

117 Base assembly Base, assembly Yes 1 

118 Hinge assembly Hinge assembly Yes 1 

119 Cable, B Cable, B Yes 1 

S01 Screw, A (CBM 3x6 NI) Screw, A Yes 6 

S02 Screw, B (CBTE 3x8 NI) Screw, B Yes 4 

S04 Screw, D (CPTE 4x12 NI) Screw, D Yes 2 

S05 Screw, E (CBTC 3x4 ZN) Screw, E Yes 10 

S06 Hexagon screw, A Hexagon screw, A Yes 2 

S07 Hexagon screw, B Hexagon screw, B Yes 4 

S09 Screw, F (CBM 3x8 NI) Screw, F Yes 2 

S15 Screw, H (CPTE 4x10NI) Screw, H Yes 2 

1041 Front panel unit - No 1 

1042 Rear panel - No 1 

1043 Bottom plate - No 1 

1046 Screw, J - No 4 

1047 Screw, K - No 4 

1048 Screw, L - No 4 

1049 Screw, M - No 1 

1050 Screw, N - No 6 

1052 Screw, P - No 2 

1053 Screw, Q - No 4 

1054 Scrwe, R - No 2 

1055 Screw, S - No 2 

Appendix B-2 Parts Information 

Rev. I


DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Case Block 

S09 

101 

102 

101 

S09 

109 

S04 

101 

108 

S15 

S06 

S04 

101 

1053 

1055 

S06 

101 

S15 

1054 

1041 

1055 

S05 

1054 

S02 

101 

S01 

S05 

S05 

S02 

101 

103 

S07 S05 

S05 

S05 

S01 

S02 

101 

S01 

101 

S05 

1042 

S05 

S05 

S01 

117 


Confidential 

DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Component Block 

S16 

S16 

110 

S16 

S16 

1050 

1050 

1050 

113 

111 

112 

1050 

1050 

1052 


Rev. I


DM-M820-013/023/113/123 Base Unit Block 

1049 

117 

1048 

1048 

118 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 


Confidential 

Parts list DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) 

Table B-2 DM-M820-014/024 /114/124 

Ref. # 

Name for technical 

reference manual 

Name for spare parts 

price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 




106 MSR assembly MSR, assembly Yes 1 







114 Electric conductive tape Electric conductive both 

sides tape 

Yes 2 This tape is used to the old 

touch panel assembly type. 

115 Touch panel unit Touch panel, unit Yes 1 Changed from touch panel 

assembly to touch panel unit. 

116 Touch panel circuit board Touch panel circuit board Yes 1 


118 Hinge assemblies Hinge assembly Yes 1 

119 Cable, A Cable, A Yes 1 

120 Upper plate Fixing plate, upper Yes 1 This plate is used to the old 

touch panel assembly 

type.(Consolidated this part 

to the touch panel unit.) 

121 Lower plate Fixing plate, lower Yes 1 This plate is used to the old 






S03 Screw, C (CPTE 2x5 NI) Screw, C Yes 1 






S10 Screw, G (CPTE 3x8 NI) Screw, G Yes 3 


S16 Screw, I (CBM 3x5NI) Screw, I Yes 4 


Rev. I


Table B-2 DM-M820-014/024 /114/124 

Ref. # 




price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 




1044 Clamps - No 1 

1045 LED circuit board - No 1 

1046 Screw, J - No 4 

1047 Screw, K - No 4 

1048 Screw, L - No 4 

1049 Screw, M - No 1 

1050 Screw, N - No 6 

1051 Screw, O - No 4 

1052 Screw, P - No 2 

1053 Screw, Q - No 4 

1054 Scrwe, R - No 2 

1055 Screw, S - No 2 


Confidential 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Case Block 

108 

101 

S09 

S04 

101 

S09 

101 

109 

102 

S06 

S04 

101 

1053 

1055 

S15 

1054 

S06 

101 

1045 

S03 

1055 

1054 

S15 

106 

1041 

S10 

1044 

S01 

S10 

S05 

S02 

101 

S01 

S05 

S05 

S02 

101 

103 

S07 S05 

S05 

S05 

S01 

S02 

101 

S01 

101 

S05 

S07 

1042 

S05 

S05 

S01 

117 


Rev. I


DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Component Block 

 

 

 

 

 

S05 

S15 

S15 

S15 

120 

S05 

S15 

S05 

S16 

121 

S16 

S05 

115 

114 

110 

S16 

S16 

S16 

110 

1057 

S16 

114 

S16 

S16 

1050 

1050 

1050 

113 

1050 

1050 

1050 

113 

111 

112 

111 

112 

1050 

1050 

1050 

116 

1052 

1050 

116 

1052 

1051 1051 

1051 1051 


Confidential 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Base unit Block 

117 

1048 

1049 

1048 

118 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 


Rev. I


Parts list DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) 

Table B-3 DM-M820-014/024 /114/124 

Ref. # 




price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 




106 MSR assembly MSR, assembly Yes 1 







115 Touch panel unit Touch panel, unit Yes 1 





122 DC Jack board DC Jack board Yes 1 



S03 Screw, C (CPTE 2x5 NI) Screw, C Yes 1 













1046 Screw, J - No 4 

1047 Screw, K - No 4 

1048 Screw, L - No 4 


Confidential 

Table B-3 DM-M820-014/024 /114/124 

Ref. # 




price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 

1049 Screw, M - No 1 

1050 Screw, N - No 6 

1051 Screw, O - No 4 

1052 Screw, P - No 2 

1053 Screw, Q - No 4 

1054 Scrwe, R - No 2 

1055 Screw, S - No 2 

1056 Screw, T - No 2 


Rev. I


DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Case Block 

108 

101 

S09 

S04 

101 

S09 

101 

109 

102 

S06 

S04 

101 

1053 

1055 

S15 

1054 

S06 

101 

1045 

S03 

1055 

1054 

S15 

106 

1041 

S10 

1044 

S01 

S10 

S05 

S02 

101 

S01 

S05 

S05 

S02 

101 

103 

S07 S05 

S05 

S05 

S01 

S02 

101 

S01 

101 

S05 

S07 

1042 

S05 

S05 

S01 

117 


Confidential 

DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Component 

Block 

S15 

S15 

S15 

S15 

S16 

115 

S16 

110 

S16 

S16 

1050 

1050 

113 

116 

111 

1050 

1051 

112 

1050 

S07 

S07 

1054 

122 

1052 


Rev. I


DM-M820-014/024/114/124 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Base unit Block 

117 

1048 

1049 

1048 

118 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 


Confidential 

Parts list DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) 

Table B-4 DM-M820-015/025/115/125 

Ref. # 

Name for technical reference 

manual 

Name for spare parts price 

list 

Part 

supply Unit Note 










114 Electric conductive tape Electric conductive both 

sides tape 

Yes 2 This tape is used to the old 

touch panel assembly type. 

115 Touch panel unit Touch panel, unit Yes 1 Changed from touch panel 

assembly to touch panel unit. 




119 Cable Cable, C Yes 1 

120 Upper plate Fixing plate, upper Yes 1 This plate is used to the old 




121 Lower plate Fixing plate, lower Yes 1 This plate is used to the old 





S02 Screw, B (CBM 3x8 NI) Screw, B Yes 4 












Rev. I


Table B-4 DM-M820-015/025/115/125 

Ref. # 

Name for technical reference 

manual 

Name for spare parts price 

list 

Part 

supply Unit Note 

1046 Screw, J - No 4 

1047 Screw, K - No 4 

1048 Screw, L - No 4 

1049 Screw, M - No 1 

1050 Screw, N - No 6 

1051 Screw, O - No 4 

1052 Screw, P - No 2 

1053 Screw, Q - No 4 

1054 Scrwe, R - No 2 

1055 Screw, S - No 2 


Confidential 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Case Block 

S09 

101 

S04 

101 

108 

102 

101 

S09 

109 

S15 

S06 

S04 

101 

1053 

1055 

1054 

S06 

101 

S15 

1041 

1054 

1055 

S05 

S02 

101 

S01 

S05 

S05 

S02 

101 

103 

S07 S05 

S05 

S05 

S01 

S02 

101 

S01 

101 

S05 

S07 

1042 

S05 

S05 

S01 

117 


Rev. I


DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Component Block 

 

 

S05 

S15 

S15 

S15 

120 

S05 

S15 

S05 

S16 

121 

S16 

S05 

115 

114 

110 

S16 

S16 

S16 

110 

1057 

S16 

114 

S16 

S16 

1050 

1050 

1050 

1050 

1050 

113 

1050 

113 

111 

112 

111 

112 

1050 

1050 

1050 

116 

1052 

1050 

116 

1052 

1051 1051 

1051 1051 


Confidential 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (SERIAL NO. *xxxx00xxxx*) Base unit Block 

117 

1048 

1049 

1048 

118 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 


Rev. I


Parts list DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) 

Table B-5 DM-M820-015/025 /115/125 

Ref. # 




price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 










115 Touch panel unit Touch panel, unit Yes 1 





122 DC Jack board DC Jack board Yes 1 















1046 Screw, J - No 4 

1047 Screw, K - No 4 

1048 Screw, L - No 4 

1049 Screw, M - No 1 

1050 Screw, N - No 6 

1051 Screw, O - No 4 

1052 Screw, P - No 2 


Confidential 

Table B-5 DM-M820-015/025 /115/125 

Ref. # 




price list 

Part 

supply 

Unit 

1053 Screw, Q - No 4 

1054 Scrwe, R - No 2 

1055 Screw, S - No 2 

1056 Screw, T - No 2 


Rev. I


DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Case Block 

S09 

101 

S04 

101 

108 

102 

101 

S09 

109 

S15 

S06 

S04 

101 

1053 

1055 

1054 

S06 

101 

S15 

1041 

1054 

1055 

S05 

S02 

101 

S01 

S05 

S05 

S02 

101 

103 

S07 S05 

S05 

S05 

S01 

S02 

101 

S01 

101 

S05 

S07 

1042 

S05 

S05 

S01 

117 


Confidential 

DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Component 

Block 

S15 

S15 

S15 

S15 

S16 

115 

S16 

110 

S16 

S16 

1050 

1050 

113 

116 

111 

1050 

1051 

112 

1050 

S07 

S07 

1054 

122 

1052 


Rev. I


DM-M820-015/025/115/125 (Later the SERIAL NO. *xxxx01xxxx*) Base unit Block 

117 

1048 

1049 

1048 

118 

1046 

1047 

1043 

119 


Confidential 

Parts list (IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model) 

Table B-6 IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model 


201 Label LABEL,EPSON 

LOGOTYPE,ECW4010 

Yes 1 

202 IM-800 front case assembly CASE,FRONT,ASS'Y Yes 1 

203 IM-800 rear case CASE,REAR Yes 1 

204 DIMM DIMM Yes 1 

205 CPU CPU, Celeron Yes 1 

206 3.5”HDD 3.5HDD Yes 1 

207 Main circuit board MAIN CIRCUIT BOARD UNIT Yes 1 

208 Riser circuit board RAISER CIRCUIT BOARD ASS'Y Yes 1 

209 COM port circuit board COM PORT CIRCUIT BOARD ASS'Y Yes 1 

210 FDD circuit board FDD CIRCUIT BOARD ASS'Y Yes 1 

211 FDD FDD UNIT Yes 1 

212 FDD cable FDD CABLE ASS'Y Yes 1 

213 Power supply POWER SUPPLY Yes 1 

214 System fan FAN SET Yes 1 

215 CPU cooler CPU COOLER Yes 1 

216 HDD cable HDD CABLE ASS'Y Yes 1 

217 LED cable LED CABLE ASS'Y Yes 1 

218 switch cable assembly POWER CABLE ASS'Y Yes 1 

219 CD-ROM CD-ROM UNIT Yes 1 

220 Ferrite core Ferrite core Yes 1 

S11 Screw, A,IM-800 SCREW,A,IM-800 Yes 5 

S12 Screw, C,IM-800 SCREW,C,IM-800 Yes 2 

S13 Screw, F,IM-800 SCREW,F,IM-800 Yes 26 

S15 Screw, B,IM-800 - Yes 4 

1001 Connector plate - No 1 

1002 CD cover - No 1 

1003 LED holder - No 1 

1004 Front case - No 1 

1005 Lower frame - No 1 

1006 Riser frame - No 1 

1007 HDD bracket - No 1 

1008 CD/FDD bracket - No 1 

1009 IM-800 upper case - No 1 

1010 IO shield - No 1 


Rev. I


Table B-6 IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model 


1011 Screw, E,IM-800 - No 6 

1013 CD-ROM cable - No 1 

1014 power supply FANP - No 1 

1015 Screw for FAN, Screw for USB interface - No 4 

1016 USB cable - No 1 

1017 COM cable - No 1 

1018 Audio cable - No 1 

1019 FFC cable - No 1 

1020 Screw, G,IM-800 - No 4 

1024 COM cable, B - No 1 


Confidential 

IM-800 for 3.5”HDD Model Component Block 

202 

1002 

A 

1019 

1009 

1020 

S12 

1018 

1008 S13 

215 

B 

219 

1004 

1013 

210 

S13 

C 

A 

S13 

S12 1020 1020 

D 

1020 

1015 

S13 

205 

S13 

H 

M 

I G 

E 

204 

S13 

S13 

S13 

S11 

S11 

208 S13 

S11 

S13 

212 

J 

S13 

S11 

1016 

E 

1010 

211 

1024 

S13 

K 

207 

1001 

S13 

1006 

D 

S13 

K 

G 

217 

218 

1011 

214 

F 

S13 

M 

H 

1003 

1017 

F 

S13 

C 

1011 

1012 

1015 

209 

220 

216 

L 

S13 

1007 

S13 

I 

B 

S13 

203 

S13 

201 

S13 1011 

S13 

1005 

213 

J 

L 

206 

S13 


Rev. I


Parts list (IM-800 24V model) 

Table B-7 IM-800 3.5”HDD with TM Printer Power Supply and Speaker Model 




Yes 1 





206 3.5”HDD 3.5HDD Yes 1 















221 SHORT PLUG SHORT PLUG, LPC-SPG Yes 2 

222 2HDD circuit board 2HDD 310 CIRCUIT BOARDASS’Y Yes 1 

223 Speaker SPEAKER, ASS’Y, IM-800 Yes 1 

224 DC cable DC cable Yes 1 

225 DC 24 board DC24V BOARD, ASS’Y ,A Yes 1 

226 Gasket ,B Gasket ,B, IM-800 Yes 1 

227 SPRING ,A SPRING ,A ,IM-800 Yes 1 

228 Double-sides tape DOUBLE - SIDES TAPE ,IM-800 ,A Yes 1 



S13 Screw, F,IM-800 SCREW,D,IM-800 Yes 26 

S15 Screw, B,IM-800 SCREW,B,IM-800 Yes 8 

S16 Screw, 2HDD C,C,S-TITE SCREW 3 x 6 Yes 2 

S17 Screw, H,IM-800 SCREW,H,IM-800 Yes 2 


Confidential 

Table B-7 IM-800 3.5”HDD with TM Printer Power Supply and Speaker Model 












1011 Screw, E,IM-800 - No 6 








1020 Screw, G,IM-800 - No 4 

1021 Bracket, 2.5HDD - No 1 

1022 Speaker, Holder - No 1 

1023 Speaker, Spacer - No 2 


1025 Cable tie - No 1 


Rev. I


IM-800 24V for 3.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model Component Block 

1002 

202 

A 

1019 

1009 

1020 

S12 

1018 

1008 S13 

215 

B 

219 

1004 

1013 

210 

S13 

C 

A 

S13 

S12 1020 1020 

D 

1020 

1015 

S13 

205 

S13 

H 

M 

I G 

E 

204 

S13 

S13 

S13 

S11 

S11 

208 S13 

S11 

S13 

1025 

212 

J 

S13 

S11 

1016 

E 

1010 

211 

1024 

S13 

K 

207 

1001 

S13 

1006 

O 

D 

S13 

K 

G 

217 

1011 

218 

S13 

S13 

225 

227 

N 

214 

F 

S13 

226 

M 

H 

1003 

N 

O 

1017 

F 

S13 

C 

1011 

1012 

1015 

209 

216 

L 

S13 

1007 

S13 

I 

B 

S13 

203 

S13 

201 

S13 1011 

S13 

1005 

213 

J 

L 

206 

S13 

1023 

S17 

223 

220 

N 

1022 


Confidential 

Parts list (IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model) 

Table B-8 IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model 




Yes 1 





206 2.5”HDD 2.5HDD Yes 2 















221 SHORT PLUG SHORT PLUG, LPC-SPG Yes 2 

222 2HDD circuit board 2HDD 310 CIRCUIT BOARDASS’Y Yes 1 

223 Speaker SPEAKER, ASS’Y, IM-800 Yes 1 



S13 Screw, F,IM-800 SCREW,D,IM-800 Yes 26 

S15 Screw, B,IM-800 SCREW,B,IM-800 Yes 8 

S16 Screw, 2HDD C,C,S-TITE SCREW 3 x 6 Yes 2 

S17 Screw, H,IM-800 SCREW,H,IM-800 Yes 2 







Rev. I


Table B-8 IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model 







1011 Screw, E,IM-800 - No 6 








1020 Screw, G,IM-800 - No 4 

1021 Bracket, 2.5HDD - No 1 

1022 Speaker, Holder - No 1 

1023 Speaker, Spacer - No 2 



Confidential 

IM-800 for 2.5”HDD Model and Speaker Model Component Block 

202 

1002 

A 

1019 

1009 

1020 

S12 

1018 

1008 S13 

215 

B 

219 

1004 

1013 

210 

S13 

C 

A 

S13 

S12 1020 1020 

D 

1020 

1015 

S13 

205 

S13 

H 

M 

I G 

E 

204 

S13 

S13 

S13 

S11 

S11 

208 S13 

S11 

S13 

212 

J 

S13 

S11 

1016 

E 

1010 

211 

1024 

S13 

N 

K 

207 

1001 

S13 

1006 

D 

S13 

K 

G 

217 

218 

1011 

214 

F 

S13 

M 

H 

1003 

1017 

F 

S13 

B 

1011 

1012 

1015 

209 

220 

L 

S13 

1007 

S13 

I 

C 

221 

S13 

203 

S13 

S13 1011 

1005 

206 

201 

S13 

213 

S13 

1023 

S17 

216 

S16 

S15 

223 

S16 

S15 

N 

1022 

J 

222 

L 

S15 


Rev. I

EPSON 

SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION

Technical Reference Manual - Support

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?